VARISPEED V7
Compact Sensorless Vector Inverter
USER’S MANUAL
Manual No.
TOEPC71060605-02-OY
1
PREFACE
Omron Yaskawa Motion Control (from now OYMC) V7AZ is a small and
simple Inverter, as easy to use as a contactor. This instruction manual
describes installation, maintenance, inspection, troubleshooting, and specifi-
cations of the V7AZ. Read this instruction manual thoroughly before opera-
tion.
OMRON YASKAWA MOTION CONTROL
General Precautions
• Some drawings in this manual are shown with protective covers or shields
removed in order to show detail with more clarity. Make sure all covers and
shields are replaced before operating the product.
• This manual may be modified when necessary because of improvements to
the product, modifications, or changes in specifications.
Such modifications are indicated by revising the manual number.
• To order a copy of this manual, or if your copy has been damaged or lost,
contact your OMRON representative.
• OMRON YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product
made by the user, since that will void the guarantee.
2
NOTATION FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Read this instruction manual thoroughly before installation, operation, mainte-
nance, or inspection of the V7AZ. In this manual, safety precautions are classi-
fied as either warnings or cautions and are indicated as shown below.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to equipment.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Even items classified as cautions may result in serious accidents in some situa-
tions. Always follow these important precautions.
: Indicates information to insure proper operation.
WARNING
CAUTION
NOTE
3
PRECAUTIONS FOR UL/cUL MARKING
• Do not connect or disconnect wiring, or perform signal checks while the
power supply is turned ON.
• The Inverter internal capacitor is still charged even after the power supply
is turned OFF. To prevent electric shock, disconnect all power before ser-
vicing the Inverter, and then wait at least one minute after the power sup-
ply is disconnected. Confirm that all indicators are OFF before
proceeding.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter. The
Inverter is an electronic device that uses semiconductors, and is thus vul-
nerable to high voltage.
• Do not remove the Digital Operator or the blank cover unless the power
supply is turned OFF. Never touch the printed circuit board (PCB) while
the power supply is turned ON.
• This Inverter is not suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering more
than 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250 V maximum (200 V Class
Inverters) or 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum (400 V
Class Inverters).
PRECAUTIONS FOR CE MARKINGS
• Only basic insulation to meet the requirements of protection class 1 and
overvoltage category II is provided with control circuit terminals.
Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product to conform to
CE requirements.
• For 400 V Class Inverters, make sure to ground the supply neutral to con-
form to CE requirements.
• For conformance to EMC directives, refer to the relevant manuals for the
requirements.
Document No. EZZ006543
• Use 75°C copper wire or the equivalent.
CAUTION
4
RECEIVING THE PRODUCT
MOUNTING
(Ref. page)
• Do not install or operate any Inverter that is
damaged or has missing parts.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury or
equipment damage.
18
(Ref. page)
• Lift the Inverter by the heatsinks. When moving
the Inverter, never lift it by the plastic case or the
terminal cover.
Otherwise, the main unit may fall and be damaged.
23
• Mount the Inverter on nonflammable material
(i.e., metal).
Failure to observe this caution may result in a fire.
23
• When mounting Inverters in an enclosure, install
a fan or other cooling device to keep the intake
air temperature below 50 °C (122 °F) for IP20
(open chassis type), or below 40 °C (105 °F) for
NEMA 1 (TYPE 1).
Overheating may cause a fire or damage the Inverter.
23
• The V7AZ generates heat. For effective cooling,
mount it vertically.
Refer to the figure in Choosing a Location to
Mount the Inverter on page 24.
24
CAUTION
CAUTION
5
WIRING
(Ref. page)
• Only begin wiring after verifying that the power
supply is turned OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock or a fire.
28
• Wiring should be performed only by qualified
personnel.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock or a fire.
28
• When wiring the emergency stop circuit, check
the wiring thoroughly before operation.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
28
• Always ground the ground terminal accord-
ing to the local grounding code.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock or a fire.
34
• For 400 V Class, make sure to ground the sup-
ply neutral.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock or a fire.
37
• If the power supply is turned ON while the FWD
(or REV) Run Command is being given, the
motor will start automatically.
Turn the power supply ON after verifying that
the RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
37
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make
the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi-
function input terminal parameter is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
112
WARNING
6
(Ref. page)
• Verify that the Inverter rated voltage coincides
with the AC power supply voltage.
Failure to observe this caution may result in personal
injury or a fire.
28
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on the
Inverter.
Performing withstand voltage tests may damage
semiconductor elements.
28
• To connect a Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor
Unit, or Braking Unit, follow the procedure
described in this manual.
Improper connection may cause a fire.
34
• Always tighten terminal screws of the main cir-
cuit and the control circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in a mal-
function, damage, or a fire.
28
• Never connect the AC main circuit power supply
to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, -,
+1, or +2.
The Inverter will be damaged and the guarantee will
be voided.
28
• Do not connect or disconnect wires or connec-
tors while power is applied to the circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
28
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
28
• To store a constant with an Enter Command by
communications, be sure to take measures for
an emergency stop by using the external termi-
nals.
Delayed response may cause injury or damage the
machine.
155
CAUTION
7
OPERATION
(Ref. page)
• Only turn ON the input power supply after con-
firming that the Digital Operator or blank cover
(optional) are in place. Do not remove the
Digital Operator or the covers while current is
flowing.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock.
38
• Never operate the Digital Operator or DIP
switches with wet hands.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock.
38
• Never touch the terminals while current is flow-
ing, even if the Inverter is stopped.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
tric shock.
38
• When the fault retry function is selected, stand
clear of the Inverter or the load. The Inverter
may restart suddenly after stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warn-
ing may result in injury.
84
• When continuous operation after power recov-
ery is selected, stand clear of the Inverter or the
load. The Inverter may restart suddenly after
stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warn-
ing may result in injury.
79
• The Digital Operator stop button can be dis-
abled by a setting in the Inverter. Install a sepa-
rate emergency stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
98
WARNING
8
(Ref. page)
• If an alarm is reset with the operation signal ON,
the Inverter will restart automatically. Reset an
alarm only after verifying that the operation sig-
nal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
37
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make
the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi-
function input terminal parameter is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
112
• If n001=5, a Run Command can be received
even while changing a constant. If sending a
Run Command while changing a constant, such
as during a test run, be sure to observe all
safety precautions.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
46, 53
(Ref. page)
• Never touch the heatsinks, which can be
extremely hot.
Failure to observe this caution may result in harmful
burns to the body.
38
• It is easy to change operation speed from low to
high. Verify the safe working range of the motor
and machine before operation.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury
and machine damage.
38
• Install a holding brake separately if necessary.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
38
WARNING
CAUTION
9
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety
measures on the elevator to prevent the eleva-
tor from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
187
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
38
• All the constants set in the Inverter have been
preset at the factory. Do not change the settings
unnecessarily.
The Inverter may be damaged.
38
(Ref. page)
CAUTION
10
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
(Ref. page)
• Never touch high-voltage terminals on the
Inverter.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an elec-
trical shock.
192
• Disconnect all power before performing mainte-
nance or inspection, and then wait at least one
minute after the power supply is disconnected.
For 400 V Class Inverters, confirm that all indi-
cators are OFF before proceeding.
If the indicators are not OFF, the capacitors are still
charged and can be dangerous.
192
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any
part of the V7AZ.
The Inverter is an electronic device that uses semi-
conductors, and is thus vulnerable to high voltage.
192
• Only authorized personnel should be permitted
to perform maintenance, inspection, or parts
replacement.
(Remove all metal objects (watches, bracelets, etc.)
before starting work.)
(Use tools which are insulated against electrical
shock.)
Failure to observe these warnings may result in an
electric shock.
192
WARNING
11
OTHERS
(Ref. page)
• The control PCB employs CMOS ICs.
Do not touch the CMOS elements.
They are easily damaged by static electricity.
192
• Do not connect or disconnect wires, connectors,
or the cooling fan while power is applied to the
circuit.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
192
• Never modify the product.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electrical shock or
injury and will void the guarantee.
• Do not subject the Inverter to halogen gases, such as fluorine,
chlorine, bromine, and iodine, at any time even during trans-
portation or installation.
Otherwise, the Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt.
CAUTION
WARNING
CAUTION
12
WARNING LABEL
A warning label is provided on the front cover of the Inverter, as shown below.
Follow the warnings when handling the Inverter.
Warning Labels
Plastic Case
Status Indicators
Warning Label Location
Nameplate
Certification Mark
FP
S
T
3
1
0
42-
8
Example of 5.5 kW for 400 V
FPST31042-74
13
CONTENTS
NOTATION FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - - - - - - 2
1 Receiving the Product - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 18
Checking the Nameplate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 19
2 Identifying the Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 20
3 Mounting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23
Choosing a Location to Mount the Inverter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23
Mounting Dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 24
Mounting/Removing Components- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25
Removing the Front Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25
Mounting the Front Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25
Removing the Terminal Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25
Mounting the Terminal Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 26
Removing the Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 26
Mounting the Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 26
Mounting the Bottom Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 27
4 Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 28
Wire and Terminal Screw Sizes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 30
Wiring the Main Circuits- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 34
Wiring the Control Circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 36
Wiring Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 37
5 Operating the Inverter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 38
Test Run - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 39
Selecting Rotation Direction- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 41
Operation Check Points- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 41
Operating the Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 42
Description of Status Indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 43
Function Indicator Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 45
MNTR Multi-function Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 46
Input/Output Terminal Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 48
Data Reception Error Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 48
14
Simple Data Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
6 Programming Features - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52
Hardware - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -52
Software (Constant) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52
Constant Setup and Initialization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53
Constant Selection/Initialization (n001) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53
Using V/f Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55
Adjusting Torque According to Application - - - - - - - - - - -55
Using Vector Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 59
Precautions for Voltage Vector Control Application - - - - -59
Motor Constant Calculation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 60
V/f Pattern during Vector Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 61
Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -62
How to Select LOCAL/REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63
Selecting Run/Stop Commands- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63
LOCAL Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63
REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -64
Operating (Run/Stop Commands) by Communications - - 64
Selecting Frequency Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -64
LOCAL Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65
REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -65
Setting Operation Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -66
Autotuning Selection (n139) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -66
Reverse Run Prohibit (n006)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 74
Multi-step Speed Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 74
Operating at Low Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -75
Adjusting Speed Setting Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -76
Adjusting Frequency Upper and Lower Limits- - - - - - - - - 77
Using Four Acceleration/Deceleration Times - - - - - - - - - 77
Momentary Power Loss Ridethrough Method (n081) - - - - 79
S-curve Selection (n023) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -80
Torque Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -81
Frequency Detection Level (n095)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -82
Jump Frequencies (n083 to n086) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 84
Continuing Operation Using Automatic Retry Attempts - - 84
Frequency Offset Selection (n146) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 85
15
Operating a Coasting Motor without Tripping - - - - - - - - - 88
Holding Acceleration/Deceleration Temporarily - - - - - - - 89
External Analog Monitoring(n066) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 90
Calibrating Frequency Meter or Ammerter (n067) - - - - - 91
Using Analog Output (AM-AC) as Pulse Train Signal - - - 91
Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max - - - - - - - 94
Operator Stop Key Selection (n007) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 98
Second motor selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 99
Selecting the Stopping Method- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 106
Stopping Method Selection (n005) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 106
Applying DC Injection Braking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 107
Simple Positioning Control when Stopping - - - - - - - - - 107
Building Interface Circuits with External Devices - - - - - - - - - 110
Using Input Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 110
Using the Multi-function Analog Inputs - - - - - - - - - - - - 120
Using Output Signals (n057, n058, n059) - - - - - - - - - - 124
Setting Frequency by Current Reference Input - - - - - - - - - - 126
Frequency Reference by Pulse Train Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - 128
Two-wire Sequence 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 129
Preventing the Motor from Stalling (Current Limit) - - - - - - - - 131
Stall Prevention during Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 133
Decreasing Motor Speed Fluctuation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 135
Slip Compensation (n002 = 0) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 135
Motor Protection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136
Motor Overload Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136
PTC Thermistor Input for Motor Overheat Protection - - 138
Selecting Cooling Fan Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 141
Using MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications - - - - - - - - - 141
MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications - - - - - - - - - - 141
Communications Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 142
Communications Connection Terminal - - - - - - - - - - - - 142
Setting Constants Necessary for Communication- - - - - 143
Message Format- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 144
Storing Constants [Enter Command] - - - - - - - - - - - - - 155
Performing Self-test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 158
Using PID Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 159
PID Control Selection (n128) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 159
16
Analog Position Control with Bi-directional PID Output - 163
Bidirectional Reference Control- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 164
Using Constant Copy Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 168
Constant Copy Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 168
READ Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 170
COPY Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 172
VERIFY Function- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 174
Inverter Capacity Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 176
Software No. Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 178
Display List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 179
Customer Specific Display Scaling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 181
Selecting Processing for Frequency Reference Loss (n064) - 183
Input/Output Open-phase Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 184
Undertorque Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 185
Using Inverter for Elevating Machines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 187
Brake ON/OFF Sequence- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 187
Stall Prevention during Deceleration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 189
Settings for V/f Pattern and Motor Constants - - - - - - - - 189
Momentary Power Loss Restart and Fault Restart - - - - 189
I/O Open-phase Protection and Overtorque Detection- - 189
Carrier Frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 189
External Baseblock Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 190
Acceleration/Deceleration Time- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 190
Contactor on the Inverter’s Output-side - - - - - - - - - - - - 190
Using MECHATROLINK-II Communications - - - - - - - - - - - - 191
7 Maintenance and Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - 192
Periodic Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 193
Part Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 194
Replacement of Cooling Fan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 195
8 Fault Diagnosis - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 197
Protective and Diagnostic Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 197
Corrective Actions of Models with Blank Cover - - - - - - - 197
Corrective Actions of Models with Digital Operator - - - - 198
Troubleshooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 212
17
9 Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 214
Standard Specifications (200 V Class) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 214
Standard Specifications (400 V Class) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 218
Standard Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 222
Sequence Input Connection with NPN/PNP Transistor - - - - - 226
Dimensions/Heat Loss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 228
Recommended Peripheral Devices- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 231
Constants List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 234
10 Conformance to CE Markings - - - - - - - - - - - - 247
CE Markings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 247
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings - - - - - - - - - 247
Low Voltage Directive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 247
EMC Directive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 248
18
1 Receiving the Product
Do not install or operate any Inverter that is dam-
aged or has missing parts.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury
or equipment damage.
After unpacking the V7AZ, check the following.
• Verify that the model number matches your purchase order or packing
slip.
• Check the Inverter for physical damage that may have occurred during
shipping.
If any part of V7AZ is missing or damaged, call for service immediately.
CAUTION
1 Receiving the Product
19
Checking the Nameplate
Example for 3-phase, 200-VAC, 0.1-kW (0.13 HP) Inverter
for European standards
Inverter Model
Input Spec.
Output Spec.
Lot No.
Serial No.
Inverter
V7AZ Series
Software Number
Specifications
Model
B
2
4
Single-phase 200 VAC
Three-phase 200 VAC
Three-phase 400 VAC 0P1
0P2
0P4
0.1 kW
0.25 kW
0.55 kW
0P7
1P5
2P2
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3P0
4P0 4.0 kW
3.0 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
4.0 kW
Applicable maximum motor output
200 V class 400 V class
No. Protective structure
0Open chassis
(IP20, IP00)*1
1Enclosed wall-mounted
(NEMA1)*2
No. Voltage Class
B
2
4
Single-phase 200 VAC
Three-phase 200 VAC
Three-phase 400 VAC
No. Specifications
ZEuropean standards
0P1
0P2
0P4
0.1 kW
0.25 kW
0.55 kW
0P7
1P5
2P2
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3P0
4P0 4.0 kW
3.0 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
4.0 kW
Applicable maximum motor output
200 V class 400 V class
CIMR-V7AZ20P1
No. Type
A With Digital Operator (with potentiometer)
A
5.5 kW
5P5
7P5 7.5 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
5.5 kW
5P5
7P5 7.5 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
20P10
Z
Note: Contact your OMRON representatives
for models without heatsinks.
*1: Inverters with outputs 0P1 to 3P7 are rated
IP20. Be sure to remove the top and bottom
covers if using open-chassis mounted Inverters
with a 5P5 or 7P5 output.
*2: A NEMA 1 rating is optional for Inverters with
outputs 0P1 to 3P7 but standard for 5P5 or 7P5.
Mass
Inverter Software Version
The inverter software version can be read out from the monitor parameter
U-10 or parameter n179. The parameter shows the last for digits of the
software number (e.g. display is“5740”for the software version VSP015740).
The manual describes the functionality of the Inverter software version
VSP015740 (0.1 to 4.0 kW) and VSP105750 (5.5 and 7.5 kW). Older software
versions do not support all described functions. Check the software version
before starting to work with this manual.
20
2 Identifying the Parts
Digital Operator
(with potentiometer)
JVOP-140
Used for setting or
changing constants.
Frequency can be set
using the potentiometer.
Digital Operator
(without potentiometer)
JVOP-147
Used for setting or
changing constants.
Blank cover
In models without a
Digital Operator, the
blank cover is mounted
in place of the Digital
Operator.
Terminal Cover Digital Operator
Front Cover
Nameplate
Heatsink
Bottom Cover
Wiring Holes
for Main Circuit
Wiring Holes
for Control Circuit
Ground Terminal
Cooling Fan
Fan Cover
2 Identifying the Parts
21
V7AZ Inverters with the Covers Removed
Example for 3-phase (200 V Class, 1.5 kW) Inverter
Example for 3-phase (200 V Class, 0.1 kW) Inverter
Frequency-setting Potentiometer
Inverter Operation Status Indicators
Short-circuit
Bar
Ground Terminals
Main Circuit Terminal Block
Control Circuit Terminal Block
Input Polarity
Switch
Ground Terminals
Terminal Resistor Switch for
Communication Circuit
Voltage/Current Change Switch for
Analog Frequency Reference Input
Frequency-setting Potentiometer
Inverter Operation Status Indicators
Short-circuit
Bar Main Circuit Terminal Block
Control Circuit Terminal Block
Input Polarity
Switch
Terminal Resistor Switch for
Communication Circuit
Voltage/Current Change Switch for
Analog Frequency Reference Input
22
Main Circuit Terminal Arrangement
The terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminals depends on the
Inverter model.
CIMR-V7AZ20P1 to 20P7, B0P1 to B0P4
CIMR-V7AZ21P5, 22P2, B0P7, B1P5, 40P2 to 42P2
CIMR-V7AZ24P0, B2P2, 43P0, 44P0
CIMR-V7AZB4P0
CIMR-V7AZ25P5, 27P5, 45P5, 47P5
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 㧙+1 +2 B1 B2 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
3 Mounting
23
3 Mounting
Choosing a Location to Mount the Inverter
Be sure the Inverter is protected from the following conditions.
• Extreme cold and heat. Use only within the specified ambient tem-
perature range:
−10 to 50 °C (14 to 122 °F) for IP20 (open chassis type),
−10 to 40 °C (14 to 105 °F) for NEMA 1 (TYPE 1)
• Rain and moisture
• Oil sprays and splashes
• Salt spray
• Direct sunlight (Avoid using outdoors.)
• Corrosive gases (e.g., sulfurized gas) or liquids
• Dust or metallic particles in the air
• Physical shock or vibration
• Magnetic noise (Examples: Welding machines, power devices, etc.)
• High humidity
• Radioactive substances
• Combustibles, such as thinner or solvents
24
Mounting Dimensions
To mount the V7AZ, the dimensions shown below are required.
• Lift the Inverter by the heatsinks. When moving the
Inverter, never lift it by the plastic case or the termi-
nal cover.
Otherwise, the main unit may fall and be damaged.
• The V7AZ generates heat. For effective cooling,
mount it vertically.
Air
Air
aa
100 mm (3.94 in.) or more
100 mm (3.94 in.) or more
Voltage Class
(V)
Max. Applicable
Motor Capacity
(kW)
Length a
200 V Single-phase
3-phase
400 V 3-phase
3.7 kW or less 30 mm (1.18 in.) min.
50 mm (1.97 in.) min.
200 V 3-phase
400 V 3-phase
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
CAUTION
3 Mounting
25
• The same space is required horizontally and vertically and
right and left for both Open Chassis (IP00, IP20) and
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA 1) Inverters.
• Always remove the top and bottom covers before install-
ing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 5.5/7.5
kW in a panel.
Mounting/Removing Components
Removing and Mounting the Digital Operator and Covers
Removing the Front Cover
Use a screwdriver to loosen the screw
(section A) on the front cover. (To pre-
vent loss, this screw cannot be
removed.) Then press the right and left
sides in direction 1 and lift the front
cover in direction 2.
Mounting the Front Cover
Mount the front cover by reversing the
order of the above procedure for
removal.
Removing the Terminal Cover
• 200 V class Inverters with 1.1 kW
and more and all 400 V class
Inverters:
After removing the front cover,
press the right and left sides of the
terminal cover in direction 1 and lift
the terminal cover in direction 2.
NOTE
1
1
2
A
26
• Inverters of 5.5 and 7.5 kW:
Use a screwdriver to loosen
the screw (section B) on the
terminal cover surface. (To
prevent loss, this screw cannot
be removed.) Then press the
right and left sides in direction
1 and lift the terminal cover in
direction 2.
Mounting the Terminal
Cover
Mount the terminal cover by
reversing the order of the above proce-
dure for removal.
Removing the Digital Operator
After removing the front cover, (fol-
low the procedure on page 25) lift the
upper and lower sides (section C) of
the right side of the Digital Operator
in direction 1.
Mounting the Digital Operator
Mount the Digital Operator by revers-
ing the order of the above procedure
for removal.
1
1
2
B
C
C
3 Mounting
27
Removing the Bottom Cover
• 200 V class Inverters with 1.1 kW
and more and all 400 V class
Inverters:
After removing the front cover and
the terminal cover, tilt the bottom
cover in direction 1 with section A
as a supporting point.
• Inverters of 5.5 and 7.5 kW
After removing the terminal cover,
use a screwdriver to loosen the
mounting screw in direction 1.
Mounting the Bottom Cover
Mount the bottom cover by reversing
the order of the above procedure for
removal.
A
A
1
1
28
4 Wiring
• Only begin wiring after verifying that the power sup-
ply is turned OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock or a fire.
• Wiring should be performed only by qualified per-
sonnel.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock or a fire.
• When wiring the emergency stop circuit, check the
wiring thoroughly before operation.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
• For the 400 V Class, make sure to ground the supply
neutral.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock or a fire.
• Verify that the Inverter rated voltage coincides with
the AC power supply voltage.
Failure to observe this caution may result in per-
sonal injury or a fire.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on the
Inverter.
Performing withstand voltage tests may damage
semiconductor elements.
• Always tighten terminal screws of the main circuit
and the control circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in a mal-
function, damage, or a fire.
• Never connect the AC main circuit power supply to
output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, -, +1,
or +2.
The Inverter will be damaged and the guarantee will
be voided.
• Do not connect or disconnect wires or connectors
while power is applied to the circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
• To store a constant with an Enter Command by com-
munications, be sure to take measures for an emer-
gency stop by using the external terminals.
WARNING
CAUTION
4 Wiring
29
Delayed response may cause injury or damage the
machine.
Wiring Instructions
1. Always connect the power supply for the main circuit
inputs to the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3
(R/L1, S/L2 for single-phase power) via a molded-case
circuit breaker (MCCB) or a fuse. Never connect the
power supply to terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, −,
+1, or +2. The Inverter may be damaged.
For single-phase Inverters, always use terminals R/L1 and
S/L2. Never connect terminal T/L3. Fuses must be of UL-
class RK5 fuse or an equivalent.
Refer to page 231 for recommended peripheral devices.
Inverter Power Supply Connection Terminals
2. If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long,
reduce the Inverter carrier frequency. For details, refer to
Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max on page
94.
3. Control wiring must be less than 50 m (164 ft) in length
and must be separated from power wiring. Use shielded
twisted-pair cable when inputting the frequency signal
externally.
4. Only basic insulation to meet the requirements of protec-
tion class 1 and overvoltage category II is provided with
control circuit terminals. Additional insulation may be
necessary in the end product to conform to CE require-
ments.
5. Closed-loop connectors should be used when wiring to the
main circuit terminals.
200-V 3-phase Input
Power Supply Speci-
fication Inverters
CIMR-V72
200-V Single Input
Power Supply Speci-
fication Inverters
CIMR-V7B
400-V 3-phase Input
Power Supply Speci-
fication Inverters
CIMR-V74
Connect to R/L1,
S/L2, and T/L3.
Connect to R/L1 and
S/L2.
Connect to R/L1,
S/L2, and T/L3.
NOTE
30
6. Voltage drop should be considered when determining the
wire size.
Voltage drop can be calculated using the following equa-
tion:
Phase-to-phase voltage drop (V)
= × Wire resistance (Ω/km) × Wiring distance (m) ×
Current
(A) × 10-3
Select a wire size so that voltage drop will be less than 2%
of the normal rated voltage.
7. If the Inverter is connected to a power transformer exceed-
ing 600 kVA, excessive peak current may flow into the
input power supply circuit, and break the converter sec-
tion. In this case, attach an AC reactor (optional) to the
Inverter input side, or a DC reactor (optional) to the DC
reactor connection terminal.
Wire and Terminal Screw Sizes
1. Control Circuits
Model Terminal
Symbols
Screws Tightening
To r q u e
N•m (lb•in)
Wires
Applicable Size Recom-
mended Size
Type
mm2AWG mm2AWG
Same
for all
models
MA, MB, MC M3 0.5 to 0.6
(4.44 to 5.33)
Twisted wires:
0.5 to 1.25,
Single: 0.5 to 1.25
20 to 16,
20 to 16
0.75 18 Shielded or
equivalent
S1 to S7, P1,
P2, SC, PC,
R+, R-, S+, S-,
FS, FR, FC,
AM, AC, RP
M2 0.22 to 0.25
(1.94 to 2.21)
Twisted wires:
0.5 to 0.75,
Single: 0.5 to 1.25
20 to 18,
20 to 16
0.75 18
3
4 Wiring
31
2. Main Circuits
200 V Class 3-phase Input Inverters
Note: The wire size is given for copper wire at 75°C (160°F).
Model Terminal Symbols Screws Tightening
Tor qu e
N•m (lb•in)
Wires
Applicable Size Recommended
Size
Type
mm2AWG mm2AWG
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
20P1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, -
, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5 0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2 18 to 14 2 14 600-V
vinyl-
sheathed
or equiva-
lent
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
20P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, -
, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5 0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2 18 to 14 2 14
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
20P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, -
, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5 0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2 18 to 14 2 14
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, -
, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5 0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2 18 to 14 2 14
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, -
, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to 13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 2 14
3.5 12
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, -
, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to 13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 3.5 12
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
24P0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, -
, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to 13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 5.5 10
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, -
, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5 2.5
(22.13)
5.5 to 8 10 to 8 8 8
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, -
, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5 2.5
(22.13)
5.5 to 8 10 to 8 8 8
32
200 V Class Single-phase Input Inverters
Note: 1. The wire size is given for copper wire at 75°C (160°F).
2. Do not use terminal T/L3 on Inverters with single-phase input.
Model Terminal Symbols Screws Tightening
To r q u e
N•m (lb•in)
Wires
Applicable Size Recommended
Size
Type
mm2AWG mm2AWG
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
B0P1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5 0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2 18 to 14 2 14 600-V vinyl-
sheathed or
equivalent
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
B0P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5 0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2 18 to 14 2 14
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
B0P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5 0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2 18 to 14 2 14
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
B0P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 3.5 12
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
B1P5
R/L1, S/L2, -, +1,
+2, B1, B2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 5.5 10
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
B2P2
R/L1, S/L2, -, +1,
+2, B1, B2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 5.5 10
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
B4P0
R/L1, S/L2, -, +1,
+2, B1, B2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
M5 3.0 (26.62) 3.5 to 8 12 to 8 8 8
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 8 14 to 8
4 Wiring
33
400 V Class 3-phase Input Inverters
Note: The wire size is given for copper wire at 75°C (160°F).
Model Terminal Sym-
bols
Screws Tightening
Tor qu e
N•m (lb•in)
Wires
Applicable Size Recommended
Size
Type
mm2AWG mm2AWG
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
40P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 2 14 600-V vinyl-
sheathed or
equivalent
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
40P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 2 14
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 2 14
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
41P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 2 14
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
42P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 2 14
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
43P0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 2 14
3.5 12
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
44P0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5 14 to 10 2 14
3.5 12
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
45P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4 1.4
(12.39)
3.5 to
5.5
12 to 10 5.5 10
CIMR-
V7ΑΖ
47P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5 2.5
(22.13)
5.5 to 8 10 to 8 5.5 10
34
Wiring the Main Circuits
• Main Circuit Input Power Supply
Always connect the power supply line to input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Never con-
nect them to terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, −, +1, or +2. The Inverter may be dam-
aged if the wrong terminals are connected.
For single-phase Inverters, always use terminals R/L1 and S/L2. Never connect
terminal T/L3.
• Grounding (Use ground terminal .)
Always ground the ground terminal according to the
local grounding code.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric
shock or a fire.
Never ground the V7AZ to the same ground as welding machines, motors, or other electri-
cal equipment.
When several V7AZ Inverters are used side by side, ground each as shown in the following
examples. Do not loop the ground wires.
Grounding
[Example of 3-phase,
400 V Class, 0.37 kW Inverters]
MCCB or
Leakage
Breaker
L1 L2 L3
NOTE
WARNING
Good Good Poor
4 Wiring
35
• Braking Resistor Connection (Optional)
To connect the braking resistor, cut the protector on terminals
B1 and B2.
To protect the braking resistor from overheating, install a ther-
mal overload relay between the braking resistor and the
Inverter. This provides a sequence that turns OFF the power
supply with thermal relay trip contacts.
Failure to observe this warning may result in a fire.
Use this same procedure when connecting a Braking Resistor Unit.
Refer to page 223.
• Inverter Output
Connect the motor terminals to U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
• Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals
Pass the cables through the wiring hole to connect them. Always mount the cover in its
original position.
WARNING
Connect with a Phillips screwdriver.
36
Wiring the Control Circuits
Only basic insulation is provided for the control circuit terminals.
Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product.
• Control Circuit Terminals
Pass the cable through the wiring hole to connect it. Always mount
the cover in its original position.
SW1 can be changed according to sequence input signal (S1 to S7)
polarity.
0 V common: NPN side (factory setting)
+24 V common: PNP side
Refer to pages 226 and 227 for SW1.
Refer to pages 126 and 142 for SW2.
Insert the wire into the lower part of the terminal block and connect
it tightly with a screwdriver.
Contact Output
0.4 mm max
(0.016 in.)
2.5 mm max
(0.098 in.)
Screwdriver Blade WidthWiring the Control Circuit Terminals
4 Wiring
37
• Keep the screwdriver vertical to the Inverter.
• Refer to Page 30 for tightening torques.
Open the front cover and verify that the strip length is 5.5 mm
(0.22 in.).
Wiring Inspection
After completing wiring, check the following.
• Wiring is proper.
• Wire clippings or screws are not left in the Inverter.
• Screws are securely tightened.
• Bare wires in the terminals do not contact other terminals.
If the power supply is turned ON while the FWD (or
REV) Run Command is given, the motor will start
automatically.
Turn the power supply ON after verifying that the
RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
1. If the FWD (or REV) Run Command is given when the
Run Command from the control circuit terminal is
selected (n003 = 1), the motor will start automatically
after the main circuit input power supply is turned ON.
2. To set the 3-wire sequence, set terminal S3 (n052) to 0.
NOTE
The wire sheath strip length must be 5.5 mm (0.22 in.).
5.5 mm
(0.22 in.)
5.5mm
CONTACT OUTPUT
SW1 SW2
Scale
WARNING
NOTE
38
5 Operating the Inverter
The Control Mode Selection (n002) is initially set to V/f control mode.
• Only turn ON the input power supply after confirm-
ing that the Digital Operator or blank cover
(optional) are in place. Do not remove the Digital
Operator or the covers while current is flowing.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock.
• Never operate the Digital Operator or DIP switches
with wet hands.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock.
• Never touch the terminals while current is flowing,
even if the Inverter is stopped.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock.
• Never touch the heatsinks, which can be extremely
hot.
Failure to observe this caution may result in harmful
burns to the body.
• It is easy to change operation speed from low to
high. Verify the safe working range of the motor and
machine before operation.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury
and machine damage.
• Install a holding brake separately if necessary.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
• All the constants set in the Inverter have been preset
at the factory. Do not change the settings unneces-
sarily.
The Inverter may be damaged.
WARNING
CAUTION
5 Operating the Inverter
39
Test Run
The Inverter operates when a frequency (speed) is set.
There are four operating modes for the V7AZ:
1. Run Command from the Digital Operator (potentiometer/digital set-
ting)
2. Run Command from the control circuit terminals
3. Run Command from MEMOBUS communications
4. Run Command from communication card (optional)
Prior to shipping, the Inverter is set up to receive the Run Command and
frequency reference from the Operator. Below are instructions for run-
ning the V7AZ using the JVOP-147 Digital Operator (without potenti-
ometer). For instructions on operation, refer to page 50.
Operation reference or frequency reference constants can be selected
separately as shown below.
Name Constant
Run
Command
Selection
n003 = 0 --- Enables run, stop, and reset from Digital Operator.
= 1 --- Enables run and stop from control circuit terminals.
= 2 --- Enables MEMOBUS communications.
= 3 --- Enables communication card (optional).
Frequency
Reference
Selection
n004 = 0 --- Enables the Digital Operator’s potentiometer setting.
= 1 --- Enables Frequency Reference 1 (constant n024).
= 2 --- Enables a voltage reference (0 to 10 V) at the control circuit
terminal.
= 3 --- Enables a current reference (4 to 20 mA) at the control circuit
terminal.
= 4 --- Enables a current reference (0 to 20 mA) at the control circuit
terminal.
= 5 --- Enables a pulse train reference at the control circuit terminal.
= 6 --- Enables MEMOBUS communications.
= 7 --- Enables a voltage reference (0 to 10 V) at the Digital Operator’s
circuit terminal.
= 8 --- Enables a current reference (4 to 20 mA) at the Digital Operator’s
circuit terminal.
= 9 --- Enables communication card (optional).
40
Operation Steps Operator
Display
Function
Indicators
Status
Indicators
1. Turn ON the power supply. 6.00
2. Set constant n004 to 1. 1
3. Set the following constants.
n019: 15.0 (acceleration time)
n020: 5.0 (deceleration time)
15.0
5.0
4. Select forward or reverse run by press-
ing or key.
Never select REV when reverse
run is prohibited.
(Forward)
or
(Reverse)
5. Set the reference by pressing or
key.
60.00
6. Press . 0.00→60.00
7. Press to stop.
If the potentiometer is switched
rapidly, the motor also acceler-
ates or decelerates rapidly in
proportion to the potentiometer
movement. Pay attention to load
status and switch the potentiom-
eter at the speed that will not
adversely affect motor move-
ment.
60.00→0.00
FREF RUN
ALARM
PRGM RUN
ALARM
PRGM RUN
ALARM
NOTE
F/R RUN
ALARM
FREF RUN
ALARM
FOUT RUN
ALARM
NOTE
FOUT RUN
ALARM
Status indicators : ON : Flashing (Long flashing) : Flashing : OFF
5 Operating the Inverter
41
Selecting Rotation Direction
It is possible to select the direction in which the motor rotates when the
Forward Run Command is executed.
The motor rotates in the opposite direction when the Reverse Run Com-
mand is executed.
Operation Check Points
• Motor rotates smoothly.
• Motor rotates in the correct direction.
• Motor does not have abnormal vibration or noise.
• Acceleration and deceleration are smooth.
• Motor current consumption is matching to load condition .
• Status indicators and Digital Operator display are correct.
n040
Setting
Description
0 The motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction as
viewed from the load when the Forward Run Command is ex-
ecuted.
1 The motor rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from
the load when the Forward Run Command is executed.
42
Operating the Digital Operator
All functions of the V7AZ are set using the Digital Operator. Below are
descriptions of the display and keypad sections.
JVOP-140 Digital Operator
Data Display Section
Function Indicators
Indicators switch to another
function each time
The displayed data can
be changed.
Press to switch
between
functions.
Press to increase
constant No./data
value.
is pressed.
Operator CN2 terminal* Press to decrease
constant No./data
value.
Status indicator
(same function as
RUN indicator)
Press to stop the motor.
(Press to reset faults.)
Press to run
the motor.
Frequency setting
potentiometer
Used to change
frequency setting.
Indicator/Display Section
(Rear side of the Operator)
CN2-1:Operator circuit terminal
(voltage reference)
CN2-2:Operator circuit terminal
(current reference)
CN2-3:GND for Operator circuit terminal
Details of Indicators (Color in parenthesis indicates the color of the indicator.)
FREF
Frequency reference
setting/monitoring
(GREEN)
F/R
Operator Run
Command FWD/REV
selection
(GREEN)
FOUT
Output frequency
monitoring
(GREEN)
IOUT
Output current
monitoring
(GREEN)
LO/RE
LOCAL/REMOTE
Selection
(RED)
MNTR
Multi-function
monitoring
(GREEN)
PRGM
Constant No./data
(RED)
Press to enter the
constant data.
(Displays the constant
data when selecting a
constant No.
for the PRGM indicator.)
* For details, refer to Operator Analog Speed Reference Block Diagram on page 167.
5 Operating the Inverter
43
Description of Status Indicators
There are two Inverter operation status indicators on the middle right
section of the face of the V7AZ. The combinations of these indicators
indicate the status of the Inverter (ON, flashing, and OFF). The RUN
indicator and status indicator on the button have the same func-
tion.
The following table shows the relationship between the Inverter condi-
tions and the indicator on the RUN button of the Digital Operator as
well as the RUN and ALARM indicators on the face of the V7AZ.
The indicators are lit, unlit or flashing reflecting the order of priority.
Priority
Digital
Operator
Face of
the V7AZ Conditions
RUN RUN ALARM
1
Power supply is shut down.
Until the Inverter become ready after the power is
turned ON.
2Fault
3
Emergency stop (Stop Command is sent from the
Digital Operator when the control circuit terminals
were used to operate the Inverter.)
Emergency stop (Emergency stop alarm is sent from
the control circuit terminal.)
Note: Indicators will be the same as with alarm
(stopped) occurring after the Inverter is stopped.
4
Emergency stop (Emergency stop fault is sent from
the control circuit terminal.)
Note: Indicators will be the same as with fault occur-
ring after the Inverter is stopped.
5Alarm (Stopped)
6
Alarm (Operating)
The Run Command is carried out when the External
Baseblock Command using the multi-function contact
input terminal is issued.
7Stopped (during baseblock)
8
Operating (Including the status that the Inverter is op-
erating at a frequency below the minimum output fre-
quency.)
During dynamic braking when starting.
9During deceleration to a stop
During dynamic braking when stopping.
:ON :Flashing (long flashing) :Flashing :OFF
RUN
ALARM
(Green)
(Red)
Operation ready
(During stop)
Coast to
a stop
Normal
operation
44
For details on how the status indicators function for Inverter faults, refer
to Chapter 8 Fault Diagnosis. If a fault occurs, the ALARM indicator
will light.
The fault can be reset by turning ON the Fault Reset signal
(or by pressing the key on the Digital Operator) with
the operation signal OFF, or by turning OFF the power sup-
ply. If the operation signal is ON, the fault cannot be reset
using the Fault Reset signal.
NOTE
5 Operating the Inverter
45
Function Indicator Description
By pressing on the Digital Operator, each of the function indi-
cators can be selected.
The following flowchart describes each function indicator.
Power ON
Frequency reference setting/monitoring
(Hz)
Sets V7AZ operating speed.
Output frequency monitoring (Hz)
Displays frequency that V7AZ is currently
outputting.
Setting disabled.
Output current monitoring (A)
Displays current that V7AZ is currently
outputting.
Setting disabled.
(forward run) (reverse run)
If the V7AZ loses power
while in one of these
modes, it will return to
the same mode once
power is restored.
Monitor No.
U-01: Frequency reference (FREF)
U-02: Output frequency (FOUT)
U-03: Output current (IOUT)
U-04: Output voltage reference (Unit: 1V)
U-05: DC voltage (Unit: 1V)
U-06: Input terminal status
U-07: Output terminal status
U-08: Torque monitor
U-09: Fault history (Last 4 faults)
U-10: Software number
U-11: Output power
U-13: Cumulative operation time
(5.5/7.5 kW only)
U-15: Data reception error
U-16: PID feedback
U-17: PID input
U-18: PID output
U-19: Frequency reference bias
monitor (%) (for software No.
VSP010028 or later)
FWD/REV Run selection
Sets the motor rotation direction when the RUN
command is given from the Digital Operator.
Setting can be changed using the or key.
AMulti-function monitoring
Description of the selected monitor is
displayed.
(Refer to page 48 for details.)
46
46
If n001=5, a Run Command can be received even
while changing a constant. If sending a Run Com-
mand while changing a constant, such as during a test
run, be sure to observe all safety precautions.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
MNTR Multi-function Monitoring
Selecting the Monitor
This function switches the operation: operation
using the Digital Operator including frequency
setting with potentiometer, operation using the
input terminals, or operation through communications.
Setting can be changed using the or key.
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
(Local) (Remote)
Constant No./data
Sets and changes data for a constant No.
Return to
(Refer to page 49 for details.)
If the V7AZ is stopped after
it has changed to any of
these modes during opera-
tion, it changes to Program
mode from Drive mode.
Even if the Run Command
is turned ON again, the
V7AZ does not operate.
However, if n001=5, the
Run Command can be
received and the V7AZ will
operate.
WARNING
Press the key. When is ON, data
can be displayed by selecting the monitor number.
Example: Monitoring the Output Voltage Reference
Select U-04 by
pressing the
or key. Output voltage reference
is displayed.
or
5 Operating the Inverter
47
Monitoring
The following items can be monitored using U constants.
* 1. The status indicator is not turned ON.
* 2. Refer to the next page for input/output terminal status.
* 3. The display range is from −99.9 to 99.99 kW.
When regenerating, the output power will be displayed in units of
0.01 kW when −9.99 kW or less and in units of 0.1 kW when more
than −9.99 kW.
Con-
stant No.
Name Unit Description
U-01 Frequency Reference
(FREF)*1
Hz Frequency reference can be monitored.
(Same as FREF)
U-02 Output Frequency
(FOUT)*1
Hz Output frequency can be monitored.
(Same as FOUT)
U-03 Output Current (IOUT)*1A Output current can be monitored.
(Same as IOUT)
U-04 Output Voltage V Output voltage can be monitored.
U-05 DC Voltage V Main circuit DC voltage can be monitored.
U-06 Input Terminal Status*2- Input terminal status of control circuit terminals can
be monitored.
U-07 Output Terminal Status*2- Output terminal status of control circuit terminals can
be monitored.
U-08 Torque Monitor % The amount of output torque per rated torque of the
motor can be monitored. When V/f control mode is
selected, “---” is displayed.
U-09 Fault History
(Last 4 Faults)
- The last four fault history records are displayed.
U-10 Software No. - Software number can be checked.
U-11 Output Power*3kW Output power can be monitored.
U-13 Cumulative
Operation Time *4
×10 H Cumulative operation time can be monitored in units
of 10 hours.
U-15 Data Reception Error*5- Contents of MEMOBUS communication data recep-
tion error can be checked.
(Contents of transmission register No. 003DH are
the same.)
U-16 PID Feedback*6% Input 100(%)/Max. output frequency or equivalent
U-17 PID Input*6%±100(%)/± Max. output frequency
U-18 PID Output*6%±100(%)/± Max. output frequency
U-19 Frequency Reference
Bias Monitor *7
% Bias can be monitored when Up/Down Command 2
is used.
48
In vector control mode, “---” will be displayed.
* 4. Applicable only for Inverters of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V
Classes).
* 5. Refer to the next page for data reception error.
* 6. Displayed in units of 0.1% when less than 100% and in units of 1% when
100% or more. The display range is from −999% to 999%.
* 7. Applicable for Inverters with software version VSP0105740(4.0kW or
less) and VSP015750(5.5kW and 7.5kW).
Input/Output Terminal Status
Data Reception Error Display
1: Terminal S1 is closed.
1: Terminal S2 is closed.
1: Terminal S3 is closed.
1: Terminal S4 is closed.
1: Terminal S5 is closed.
1: Terminal S6 is closed.
1: Terminal S7 is closed.
Not used
Input Terminal Status
1: Terminal MA-MC is closed.
1: Terminal P1-PC is closed.
1: Terminal P2-PC is closed.
Not used
Output Terminal Status
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used
1: Parity error
1: Over run error
1: Framing error
1: Timeover
Not used
5 Operating the Inverter
49
Fault History Display Method
When U-09 is selected, a four-digit box is displayed. The three digits
from the right show the fault description, and the digit on the left shows
the order of fault (from one to four). Number 1 represents the most
recent fault, and numbers 2, 3, 4 represent the other faults, in ascending
order of fault occurrence.
Example:
yyyyyy 4-digit number
: Order of fault (1 to 4)
: Fault description
"---" is displayed if there is no fault.
(Refer to Chapter 8 Fault Diagnosis for details.)
Switching Fault History Records
The fault that is displayed can be changed using the or key.
Clearing the Fault History
Set constant n001 to 6 to clear the fault history. The display will return
to n001 after 6 is set.
Note: Initializing the constants (n001=12, 13) also clears the fault history.
Setting and Referencing Constants
The following diagram shows how to select and change constants.
REMOTE/LOCAL
selection
Constant
No./
data n003
Operation
reference
selection
Factory setting: 0
Operator reference
Set to 1
Control circuit
terminal reference
(flashing when changing)
Data set
Return to
constant No.
display after
1 second
• Setting n003 (Run Command selection)
50
Simple Data Setting
Digital setting (refer to 5 Operating the Inverter) and potentiometer set-
ting are both possible for simple acceleration/deceleration operation of
the V7AZ.
Digital setting is set at the factory (n004=1). For the model with JVOP-
140 Digital Operator (with potentiometer), factory setting is set by a fre-
quency-setting potentiometer (n004=0).
Following is an example in which the function indicators are used to set
frequency reference, acceleration time, deceleration time, and motor
direction.
5 Operating the Inverter
51
Data Setting by Frequency-setting Potentiometer
Operation Steps Operator
Display
Function
Indicators
Status
Indicators
1. Turn the potentiometer fully to the left.
Then, turn the power ON.
0.00
2. F/R flashes.
Select FWD/REV Run using keys.
Never select REV when reverse
run is prohibited.
FOR
or
REV
3. Press DSPL to flash FREF. Then press
RUN.
0.00
4. Operate the motor by turning the poten-
tiometer to the right. (Frequency refer-
ence corresponding to the
potentiometer position is displayed.)
If the potentiometer is switched
rapidly, the motor also acceler-
ates or decelerates rapidly cor-
responding to the potentiometer
movement. Pay attention to load
status and switch the potentiom-
eter at a speed that does not
affect motor movement.
0.00 to
60.00
Minimum
output
frequency is
1.50 Hz
FREF RUN
ALARM
NOTE
F/R RUN
ALARM
FREF RUN
ALARM
NOTE
FREF RUN
ALARM
Status indicators : ON : Flashing (Long flashing) : Flashing : OFF
52
6 Programming Features
Factory settings of the constants are shaded in the tables.After wiring is
complete, be sure to make the following settings before operation.
Hardware
Make the following settings before the Inverter is turned ON.
Software (Constant)
Item Ref.
page
Sequence input signal (S1 to S7) polarity selection 226
Voltage reference / current reference input selection of con-
trol circuit terminal FR
126
Item Ref.
page
Environment
setting
Constant Selection / Initialization (n001) 53
Control Mode Selection (n002) 59
Run Command Selection (n003) 63
Frequency Reference Selection (n004) 64
Stopping Method Selection (n005) 106
Basic
characteristics
and frequency ref-
erence setting
V/f pattern setting (n011 to n017) 55
Acceleration Time 1 (n019),
Deceleration Time 1 (n020)
77
Frequency Reference 1 to 8
(n024 to n031)
74
Motor protection Motor Rated Current (n036) 136
Electric Thermal Motor Protection
Selection (n037)
136
Countermeasure
for noise and leak-
age current
Carrier Frequency Reference (n080) 94
Using an optional
braking resistor
Stall Prevention during Deceleration
(n092)
134
6 Programming Features
53
Constant Setup and Initialization
Constant Selection/Initialization (n001)
If n001=5, a Run Command can be received even
while changing a constant. If sending a Run Com-
mand while changing a constant, such as during a test
run, be sure to observe all safety precautions.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
The following table lists the data that can be set or read when n001 is
set. By setting this constant, the fault history can be cleared and the con-
stants initialized. Unused constants between n001 and n179 are not dis-
played.
* 1. Excluding setting-disabled constants.
* 2. Refer to page 112.
appears on the display for one second and the set data
returns to its initial values in the following cases.
1. If the set values of Multi-function Input Selections 1 to 7
n001
Setting
Constant That Can Be Set Constant That Can Be Referenced
0 n001 n001 to n179
1n001 to n049*1
2n001 to n079*1
3n001 to n119*1
4n001 to n179*1
5n001 to n179*1
(Run Command can be received in Program mode.)
6 Fault history cleared
7 to 11 Not used
12 Initialize
13 Initialize (3-wire sequence)*2
WARNING
NOTE
54
(n050 to n056) are the same
2. If the following conditions are not satisfied in the V/f pat-
tern setting:
Max. Output Frequency (n011) ≥ Max. Voltage Output
Frequency (n013)
> Mid. Output Frequency
(n014)
≥ Min. Output Frequency
(n016)
Note: Mid. Output Frequency (n014) is also used for
motor 2 settings, n014 has to be lower than n140 and
n147.
For details, refer to Adjusting Torque According to Appli-
cation (V/f Pattern Setting) on page 55.
3. If the following conditions are not satisfied in the jump
frequency settings:
Jump Frequency 3 (n085) ≤ Jump Frequency 2 (n084)
≤ Jump Frequency 1 (n083)
4. If the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) ≤ Fre-
quency Reference Upper Limit (n033)
5. If the Motor Rated Current (n036) ≤ 150% of Inverter
rated current
6. If one of the Acceleration/Deceleration Time settings
(n019 to n022) exceeds 600.0 sec. and it is tried to set
n018 to 1 (Acceleration/Deceleration Time Unit 0.01 sec).
6 Programming Features
55
Using V/f Control Mode
V/f control mode is preset at the factory.
Control Mode Selection (n002) = 0: V/f control mode (factory setting)
1: Vector control mode
Adjusting Torque According to Application
Adjust motor torque by using the V/f pattern and full-range automatic
torque boost settings.
V/f Pattern Setting
Set the V/f pattern in n011 to n017 as described below. Set each pattern
when using a special motor (e.g., high-speed motor) or when requiring
special torque adjustment of the machine.
Note: The values in the parentheses are for the 400 V Class of Inverters.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n011 Max. Output Frequency 0.1 Hz 50.0 to 400.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
n012 Max. Voltage 0.1 V 0.1 to 255.0 V
(0.1 to 510.0 V)
200.0 V
(400.0 V)
n013 Max. Voltage Output Fre-
quency (Base Frequency)
0.1 Hz 0.2 to 400.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
n014 Mid. Output Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.1 to 399.9 Hz 1.3 Hz
n015 Mid. Output Frequency
Voltage
0.1 V 0.1 to 255.0 V
(0.1 to 510.0 V)
12.0 V*
(24.0 V)
n016 Min. Output Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.1 to 10.0 Hz 1.3 Hz
n017 Min. Output Frequency
Voltage
0.1 V 0.1 to 50.0 V
(0.1 to 100.0 V) 12.0 V*
(24.0 V)
Be sure to satisfy the following
conditions for the settings of n011 to
n017.
n016 ≤ n014 < n013 ≤ n011
If n016 = n014, the setting of n015
will be disabled.
Note: n014 is also used for motor 2
settings. (n014 < n140, n147)
f
(Frequency)
V: (Voltage)
56
* 10.0 V (20.0 V) for Inverters of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V
Classes).
6 Programming Features
57
Typical Setting of the V/f Pattern
Set the V/f pattern according to the application as described below. For
400-V Class Inverters, the voltage values (n012, n015, and n017)
should be doubled. When running at a frequency exceeding 50/60 Hz,
change the Maximum Output Frequency (n011).
Note: Always set the maximum output frequency according to the motor char-
acteristics.
1. For General-purpose Applications
2. For Fans/Pumps
3. For Applications Requiring High Starting Torque
Increasing the voltage of the V/f pattern increases motor torque, but
an excessive increase may cause motor overexcitation, motor over-
heating, or vibration.
Note: Constant n012 must be set to motor rated voltage.
Motor Specification: 60 Hz Motor Specification: 50 Hz
(Factory setting)
Motor Specification: 60 Hz Motor Specification: 50 Hz
10
1.5 30 60 f
50
200
V
10
1.3 25 50 f
50
200
V
Motor Specification: 60 Hz Motor Specification: 50 Hz
18
1.5
360f
24
200
V
18
1.3 2.5
50 f
24
200
V
58
Full-range Automatic Torque Boost (when V/f Mode is
Selected: n002=0)
The motor torque requirement changes according to load conditions.
The full-range automatic torque boost adjusts the voltage of the V/f pat-
tern according to requirements. The V7AZ automatically adjusts the
voltage during constant-speed operation, as well as during acceleration.
The required torque is calculated by the Inverter.
This ensures tripless operation and energy-saving effects.
Normally, no adjustment is necessary for the Torque Compensation
Gain (n103, factory setting: 1.0). When the wiring distance between the
Inverter and the motor is long, or when the motor generates vibration,
change the automatic torque boost gain. In these cases, set the V/f pat-
tern (n011 to n017).
Adjustment of the Torque Compensation Time Constant (n104) and the
Torque Compensation Iron Loss (n105) are normally not required.
Adjust the torque compensation time constant under the following con-
ditions:
• Increase the setting if the motor generates vibration.
• Reduce the setting if response is slow.
Output voltage Torque Compensation Gain (n103) Required torque
Required torque Increase voltage
V
(Voltage)
f (Frequency)
Operation
6 Programming Features
59
Using Vector Control Mode
Set the Control Mode Selection (n002) to use vector control mode.
n002 = 0: V/f control mode (factory setting)
1: Vector control mode
Precautions for Voltage Vector Control Application
Vector control requires motor constants. The factory settings constants
have been set at the factory prior to shipment. Therefore, when a motor
designed for an Inverter is used or when a motor from any other manu-
facturer is driven, the required torque characteristics or speed control
characteristics may not be maintained because the constants are not suit-
able. Set the following constants so that they match the required motor
constants.
* Setting depends on Inverter capacity. (Refer to pages 245 and 246.)
Adjustment of the Torque Compensation Gain (n103) and the Torque
Compensation Time Constant (n104) is normally not required.
Adjust the torque compensation time constant under the following con-
ditions:
• Increase the setting if the motor generates vibration.
• Reduce the setting if response is slow.
Adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (n111) while driving the load so
that the target speed is reached. Increase or decrease the setting in incre-
ments of 0.1.
Con-
stant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n106 Motor Rated Slip 0.1 Hz 0.0 to
20.0 Hz
*
n107 Motor Line-to-
neutral Resis-
tance
0.001 Ω
(less than 10 Ω)
0.01 Ω
(10 Ω or more)
0.000 to
65.50 Ω*
n036 Motor Rated Cur-
rent
0.1 A 0% to 150%
of Inverter
rated current
*
n110 Motor No-load
Current
1% 0% to 99%
(100% =
motor rated
current)
*
60
• If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensa-
tion gain.
• If the speed is more than the target value, reduce the slip compensa-
tion gain.
Adjustment of the Slip Compensation Time Constant (n112) is normally
not required. Adjust it under the following conditions:
• Reduce the setting if response is slow.
• Increase the setting if speed is unstable.
Select slip compensation status during regeneration as follows:
Motor Constant Calculation
An example of motor constant calculation is shown below.
1. Motor Rated Slip (n106)
2. Motor Line-to-neutral Resistance (n107)
Calculations are based on the line-to-line resistance and insulation
grade of the motor test report.
3. Motor Rated Current (n036)
= Rated current at motor rated frequency (Hz)*1 (A)
4. Motor No-load Current (n110)
* 1. Base frequency (Hz) during constant output control
* 2. Rated speed (rpm) at base frequency during constant output control
n113 Setting Slip Correction during Regenerative Operation
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
120 × Motor rated frequency (Hz)*1
Number of motor poles Motor rated speed (min-1)*2
120/Number of motor poles
E type insulation: Test report of line-to-line resistance at 75°C (Ω) × 0.92 ×
B type insulation: Test report of line-to-line resistance at 75°C (Ω) × 0.92 ×
F type insulation: Test report of line-to-line resistance at 115°C (Ω) × 0.87 ×
No-load current (A) at motor rated frequency (Hz)*1
Rated current (A) at motor rated frequency (Hz)*1100 (%)
6 Programming Features
61
Set n106 (Motor Rated Slip), n036 (Motor Rated Current), n107 (Motor
Line-to-neutral Resistance), and n110 (Motor No-load Current) accord-
ing to the motor test report.
To connect a reactor between the Inverter and the motor, set n108 to the
sum of the initial value of n108 (Motor Leakage Inductance) and the
externally mounted reactor inductance. Unless a reactor is connected,
n108 (Motor Leakage Inductance) does not have to be set according to
the motor.
V/f Pattern during Vector Control
Set the V/f pattern as follows during vector control:
The following examples are for 200 V Class motors. When using 400 V
Class motors, double the voltage settings (n012, n015, and n017).
Standard V/f
[Motor Specification: 60 Hz]
(V)
(Hz)
[Motor Specification: 50 Hz]
(V)
(Hz)
[Motor Specification: 50 Hz]
(V)
(Hz)
High Starting Torque V/f
[Motor Specification: 60 Hz]
(V)
(Hz)
62
When operating with a frequency larger than 60/50 Hz, change only the
Max. Output Frequency (n011).
Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Mode
The following functions can be selected by switching LOCAL or
REMOTE mode. To select the Run/Stop Command or frequency refer-
ence, change the mode in advance depending on the following applica-
tions.
• LOCAL mode: Enables the Digital Operator for Run/Stop Com-
mands and FWD/REV Run Commands. The fre-
quency reference can be set using the potentiometer
or .
• REMOTE mode: Enables Run Command Selection (n003).
The frequency reference can be set using the Fre-
quency Reference Selection (n004).
Constant torque
Constant output or
variable output
Base point
n013
=60 or 50 Hz n011
=90 Hz
n
012
=
200 V
6 Programming Features
63
How to Select LOCAL/REMOTE Mode
Selecting Run/Stop Commands
Refer to Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Mode (page 62) to select either
the LOCAL mode or REMOTE mode.
The operation method (Run/Stop Commands, FWD/REV Run Com-
mands) can be selected using the following method.
LOCAL Mode
When Lo (local mode) is selected for Digital Operator ON
mode, or when the LOCAL/REMOTE switching function is set and the
input terminals are turned ON, run operation is enabled by the or
on the Digital Operator, and FWD/REV is enabled by the
ON mode (using the or key).
When LOCAL/REMOTE
switching function is not
set for multi-function
input selection
(When 17 is not set
for any of constants
n050 to n056)
Select Lo for
operator
LO/RE selection.
Select rE for
operator
LO/RE selection.
When LOCAL/REMOTE
switching function is set
for multi-function input
selection
(When 17 is set for
any of constants
n050 to n056)
Turn ON multi-
function input
terminal.
Turn OFF multi-
function input
terminal.
REMOTE mode
LOCAL mode
STOP
64
REMOTE Mode
1. Select REMOTE mode.
The following two methods can be used to select REMOTE mode.
• Select rE (REMOTE mode) for the selection.
• When the LOCAL/REMOTE switching function is selected for
the multi-function input selection, turn OFF the input terminal to
select REMOTE mode.
2. Select the operation method by setting constant n003.
n003=0: Enables the Digital Operator (same with LOCAL mode).
=1: Enables the multi-function input terminal (see fig. below).
=2: Enables communications (refer to page 141).
=3: Enables communication card (optional).
• Example when using the multi-function input terminal as opera-
tion reference (two-wire sequence)
• For an example of three-wire sequence, refer to page 112.
• For more information on how to select the sequence polarity, refer
to page 226.
Note: When the Inverter is operated without the Digital Operator, always set
constant n010 to 0.
n010 = 0: Detects fault contact of the Digital Operator (factory setting)
= 1: Does not detect fault contact of the Digital Operator
Operating (Run/Stop Commands) by Communications
Setting constant n003 to 2 in REMOTE mode enables using Run/Stop
commands via MEMOBUS communications. For commands using
communications, refer to page 141.
Selecting Frequency Reference
Select REMOTE or LOCAL mode in advance. For the method for
selecting the mode, refer to page 63.
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
n003: 1 (Factory setting: 0)
n050: 1 (Factory setting)
n051: 2 (Factory setting)
6 Programming Features
65
LOCAL Mode
Select the command method using constant n008.
n008=0: Enables using the potentiometer on the Digital Operator.
=1: Enables digital setting on the Digital Operator
(factory setting).
The factory setting for models with the Digital Operator
with a potentiometer (JVOP-140) is n008=0.
• Digital Setting Using the Digital Operator
Input the frequency while is lit (press after setting the
numeric value).
Frequency reference setting is effective when 1 (factory setting: 0) is set
for constant n009 instead of pressing .
n009 =0: Enables frequency reference setting using the key.
=1: Disables frequency reference setting using the key.
REMOTE Mode
Select the command method in constant n004.
n004 =0: Enables frequency reference setting using the potentiometer
on the Digital Operator.
=1: Enables using frequency reference 1 (n024) (factory setting)
Factory setting of models with the Digital Operator with
a potentiometer (JVOP-140) is n004=0.
=2: Enables a voltage reference (0 to 10 V) (refer to the figure
on page 65).
=3: Enables a current reference (4 to 20 mA) (refer to page 126).
=4: Enables a current reference (0 to 20 mA) (refer to page 126).
=5: Enables a pulse train reference (refer to page 128).
=6: Enables communication (refer to page 141).
=7: Enables a voltage reference on Digital Operator circuit
terminal CN2 (0 to 10 V)
=8: Enables a current reference on Digital Operator circuit
terminal CN2 (4 to 20 mA)
=9: Enables communication card (optional).
Example of frequency reference by voltage signal
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
IM
2 kΩ
(0 to +10 V) FS
FR (Master Frequency Reference)
FC (0 V)
n004=2
(factory setting: 1)
(Frequency Setting Power
+12 V 20 mA
Master
Frequency
Reference
66
Setting Operation Conditions
Autotuning Selection (n139)
Motor data required for vector control can be measured and set by
inputting the data from the nameplate of the motor to be used and per-
forming autotuning for the motor. Autotuning is possible only for motor
1.
Autotuning mode cannot be entered when motor 2 is selected
using a Motor Switching Command allocated to a multi-func-
tion input (i.e., Autotuning Selection (n139) setting is not
possible).
n139 Settings
Note: Setting is not possible when motor 2 is selected using a Motor Switching
Command allocated to a multi-function input. ("Err" will be displayed
on the Digital Operator, and the setting will return to the value before the
change.)
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set
motor constants when using the V/f control method, when the cable
length is long, etc.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
One of the following two autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotational autotuning
• Stationary autotuning for motor line-to-neutral resistance only
Always confirm the precautions before autotuning.
Con-
stant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n139 Autotuning Selection −0 to 2 0
Setting Function
0 Disabled
1 Rotational autotuning (motor 1)
2 Stationary autotuning for motor line-to-neutral
resistance only (motor 1)
NOTE
6 Programming Features
67
• Rotational Autotuning (n139 = 1)
Rotational autotuning is used only for open-vector control. Set n139 to
1, input the data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the
Digital Operator. The Inverter will stop the motor for approximately
1 minute and then set the required motor constants automatically while
operating the motor for approximately 1 minute.
1. When performing rotational autotuning, be sure to sepa-
rate the motor from the machine and first confirm that it is
safe for the motor to rotate.
2. For a machine in which the motor itself cannot be rotated,
set the values from the motor test report.
3. If automatic rotation poses no problem, perform rotational
autotuning to ensure performance.
• Stationary Autotuning for Motor Line-to-neutral Resistance
Only (n139 = 2)
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable
is long or the cable length has changed since installation or when the
motor and Inverter have different capacities.
Set n139 to 2 for open-loop vector control, and then press the RUN key
on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the stationary
motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance (n107) and cable resistance will be automatically measured.
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary auto-
tuning for motor line-to-neutral resistance only is per-
formed even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch
the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning for motor line-to-
neutral resistance only connected to a conveyor or other
machine, ensure that the holding brake is not activated
during autotuning.
Precautions before Using Autotuning
Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
• Autotuning the Inverter is fundamentally different from autotuning
the servo system. Inverter autotuning automatically adjusts parame-
ters according to detected motor constants, whereas servo system
autotuning adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the
load.
NOTE
NOTE
68
• When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the
rated speed or higher), use a motor with a rated voltage that is 20 V
less than the input power supply voltage of the Inverter for 200V-
class Inverters and 40 V less for 400V-class Inverters. If the rated
voltage of the motor is the same as the input power supply voltage,
the voltage output from the Inverter will be unstable at high speeds
and sufficient performance will not be possible.
• Use stationary autotuning for motor line-to-neutral resistance only
whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a
load. (To ensure performance, set the value from the motor test
report.)
• Use rotational autotuning if performing autotuning is possible while
not connected to a load.
• If rotational autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load,
the motor constants will not be found accurately and the motor may
exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autotuning for
a motor connected to a load.
• The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs
will be as shown in the following table during autotuning. When per-
forming autotuning with the motor connected to a load, be sure that
the holding brake is not applied during autotuning, especially for
conveyor systems or similar equipment.
• To cancel autotuning, always use the key on the Digital
Operator.
Precautions for Using Autotuning(when motor voltage > supply
voltage)
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning if using a motor with a rated voltage
higher than the Inverter input power supply.
1. Input the rated voltage from the motor nameplate for the Maximum Voltage (n012).
2. Set the Maximum Voltage Output Frequency (n013) to the base frequency on the
motor nameplate.
3. Perform autotuning.
4. Record the Motor No-load Current (n110).
Tuning Mode Multi-function Inputs Multi-function Outputs
Rotational autotuning Do not function. Same as during nor-
mal operation
Stationary autotuning
for motor line-to-neu-
tral resistance only
Do not function. Maintain same status
as when autotuning is
started.
STOP
DSPL PRGM
6 Programming Features
69
5. Calculate the rated secondary current of the motor using the following equation:
6. Input the power supply voltage for the Maximum Voltage (n012).
7. Input the following calculated value for the Maximum Voltage Output
Frequency (n013):
8. Perform autotuning again.
9. Record the Motor No-load Current (n110) again.
10. Calculate the rated secondary current of the motor using the following equa-
tion:
11. Input the following calculated value for the Motor Rated Slip (n106):
1. When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated
speed or higher), set n012 (Max. Voltage) to the input power supply
voltage × 0.9.
2. When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the
output current will increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced.
Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.
Operating Procedure
1. Confirm the following:
• The motor is separated from the machine system.
• The motor shaft lock key is removed.
• If there is a brake, it is released.
• The wiring is correct.
2. The Inverter power supply is ON.
3. There is no error.
4. Select Program Mode by pressing until is lit.
5. Set the following constants for the selected motor to the nameplate
R
ated Secondary Current Rated Current()
2No-Load Current()
2
–=
Maximum Voltage Output Frequency
Base Frequency on the Motor Nameplate Power Supply Voltage×
Rated Voltage on the Motor Namplate
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=
Rated Secondary Current
Rated Secondary Current calculated in Step 5 Rated Voltage on Motor Nameplate×
Power Supply Voltage
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=
Motor Rated Slip
Base Freq. from Motor Nameplate Rated Speed from Motor Nameplate Number of Poles
120
----------------------------------------
×–
⎝ ⎠
⎛ ⎞
No-Load Current in Step 9 No-Load Current in Step 4
Rated Secondary Current in Step 5
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
×
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
=
NOTE
70
values.
When performing precision setting (i.e., when performing autotun-
ing using a motor test report or design data), the input data to set
when autotuning will differ. Refer to the table below.
6. Set the Autotuning Selection (n139).
7. Press the key to select the autotuning mode.
• The Digital Operator will display "TUn." The shows the
autotuning method selected for n139.
• All function indicators will turn OFF.
• The status indicators will return to operation ready status.
• Only the , , and keys will be accepted in
autotuning mode.
• Autotuning will start when the key is input.
• Autotuning will be cancelled when the key is input
Constant
No.
Name Setting
Range
Remarks
n012 Maximum Voltage 0.1 to
255.0
Set to the rated voltage from
the nameplate.
n013 Maximum Voltage
Output Frequency
0.2 to
400.0
Set to the base frequency from
the nameplate.
n036 Motor Rated Current 0.0 to
999.9
Set to the rated current from
the nameplate.
n106 Motor Rated Slip 0.0 to
20.0 Hz
Set to the value of the following
equation using data from the
nameplate:
Base frequency − Rated speed
× Number of poles / 120
Name Simple Setting Precision Setting
Maximum Voltage Motor rated voltage Voltage under no-load con-
ditions at motor rated speed
Maximum Voltage
Output Frequency
Motor base frequency Frequency under no-load
conditions at rated speed
Motor Rated Slip Base frequency − Rated
speed × Number of poles /
120
Slip at rated torque
DSPL
DSPL STOP
STOP
6 Programming Features
71
• When the key is input, status will return again to Program
Mode, and constants can be changed.
8. Press the key to perform autotuning. Power will be supplied
to the motor with the selected autotuning method.
• "TUn" will flash during autotuning.
• All function indicators will turn OFF.
• The status indicators will change to normal operation status.
9. Tuning Completed
• When autotuning has been completed properly, "End" will be dis-
played and constants will be changed according to the tuning
results.
• When rotational autotuning is completed, the Middle Output Fre-
quency Voltage and Minimum Output Frequency Voltage will be
calculated and set according to the selected Maximum Voltage as
shown in the following table.
10.Press the key to select the Drive Mode. This completes auto-
tuning.
Error Processing during Autotuning
• Errors and alarms that occur during normal operation are also
detected during autotuning.
• If an error or alarm occurs, the motor will coast to a stop (baseblock)
and autotuning will be cancelled.
Constant
No.
Name Setting
Range
Remarks
n015 Middle Output Fre-
quency Voltage
0.1 to
255.0
(Factory-set Middle Output Fre-
quency Voltage) × (Maximum
Voltage set value) / (Factory-
set Maximum Voltage)
n017 Minimum Output Fre-
quency Voltage
0.1 to
50.0
(Factory-set Minimum Output
Frequency Voltage) × (Maxi-
mum Voltage set value) / (Fac-
tory-set Maximum Voltage)
DSPL
DSPL
72
• If an error in measurement occurs or the key has been pressed
during autotuning, an EXX error will be displayed, the motor will
coast to a stop, and autotuning will be cancelled. This error message,
however, does not remain in the error log. Refer to page 211 for
information on errors.
• If autotuning is cancelled, constants changed by autotuning will auto-
matically return to their values before the start of autotuning.
• If an error occurs while decelerating to a stop at the end of autotun-
ing, an error will be displayed on the Digital Operator, but autotuning
processing will not be cancelled. The results of autotuning will be
valid.
Precautions after Using Autotuning
For a fixed output region, the V/f pattern for the maximum point in the
output region must be set after completing autotuning. To increase the
motor’s rated speed by 1 to 1.2 times or when using a fixed output
motor, make the following changes after autotuning. Do not change
n012 (Max. Voltage) or n013 (Max. Voltage Output Frequency).
• Increasing the Motor’s Rated Speed by 1 to 1.2 Times
To increase the motor’s rated speed by 1 to 1.2 times, use the following
formula to change the setting of Max. Output Frequency (n011):
Max. output frequency = (motor rated speed) x (no. of motor poles)/120
(Hz) x 1 to 1.2)
If the motor’s speed is increased beyond the rated speed, fixed output
characteristics will be used at high speeds and motor torque will be
reduced.
• Applications to Constant Output Motors Such as Motors for
Machine Tools
Use the following formula to change the settings of n011 (Max. Output
Frequency) when using a motor with a fixed output, e.g., a motor for a
machine tool:
n011 = Frequency (Hz) at maximum speed under no-load conditions
(load rate = 0)
Do not change the motor constants after performing autotuning.
STOP
6 Programming Features
73
Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
Function indicators on the Digital Operator change during autotuning as
in the following diagram.
PRGM
TUn
DSPLDSPL
E03
STOP
TUn
RUN E12
STOP
E04
E09
E05
End XXX
FREF
DSPL
RESET
STOP
Function
Indicators
Lit
Set constants required for autotuning.
• Maximum Voltage
• Maximum Voltage Frequency
• Motor Rated Current
• Motor Rated Slip
Set Autotuning Selection.
• Rotational / Resistance-only
stationary
Digital Opera-
tor Display
Lit
Autotuning mode
(Waiting for RUN input
• Set constants for tuning.
Digital Oper-
ator Display
Flashing
Resistance tuning
• DC voltage (20%, 40%, 60%)
applied.
Resistance-only
stationary
Rotational
No-load Current Tuning
• Acceleration
• Tuning
• Deceleration
• Return constants set for tuning to their
original values.
• Write tuned constants.
Digital Opera-
tor Display
Lit
Autotuning completed.
Function
Indicators
Lit
Frequency reference setting /
monitor
Digital Operator
Display
Lit
Cancelled because
of STOP key
Digital Operator
Display
Lit
Cancelled because of current
detection error.
Digital Operator
Display
Lit
Cancelled because of
resistance error.
Digital Operator
Display
Lit
Cancelled because of
acceleration error.
Digital Operator
Display
Lit
Cancelled because of no-load
current error.
Digital Operator
Display
Lit
Cancelled because of
normally detected error.
74
Reverse Run Prohibit (n006)
The Reverse Run Prohibit setting disables accepting a Reverse Run
Command from the control circuit terminal or Digital Operator. This
setting is used for applications where a Reverse Run Command can
cause problems.
Multi-step Speed Selection
Up to 17 speed steps (including Jog frequency reference) can be set
using the following combinations of frequency reference and input ter-
minal selections.
Setting Description
0 Reverse run enabled.
1 Reverse run disabled.
8-step speed change
n003=1 (Operation mode selection)
n004=1 (Frequency reference selection)
n024=25.0 Hz (Frequency reference 1)
n025=30.0 Hz (Frequency reference 2)
n026=35.0 Hz (Frequency reference 3)
n027=40.0 Hz (Frequency reference 4)
n028=45.0 Hz (Frequency reference 5)
n029=50.0 Hz (Frequency reference 6)
n030=55.0 Hz (Frequency reference 7)
n031=60.0 Hz (Frequency reference 8)
n054=6 (Multi-function contact input terminal S5)
n055=7 (Multi-function contact input terminal S6)
n056=8 (Multi-function contact input terminal S7)
n053=1
When all multi-function
reference inputs are OFF, the
frequency reference selected
by constant n004 (Frequency
Reference Selection) becomes
effective.
NOTE
S1
S2
S5
S6
S7
S3
S4
SC
FWD
Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
External Fault
Fault Reset
Multi-step
Speed Ref 1
Multi-step
Speed Ref 2
Multi-step
Speed Ref 3
* For more information on how to
select the sequence voltage and the
current input, refer to page 226.
6 Programming Features
75
n050 = 1 (Input terminal S1) (factory setting)
n051 = 2 (Input terminal S2) (factory setting)
n052 = 3 (Input terminal S3) (factory setting)
n053 = 5 (Input terminal S4) (factory setting)
n054 = 6 (Input terminal S5) (factory setting)
n055 = 7 (Input terminal S6) (factory setting)
n056 = 8 (Input terminal S7) (Change the setting to 8.)
16-step speed operation
Set frequency references 9 to 16 for n120 to n127.
Set the input terminal for a multi-step speed reference using the multi-
function input selection.
Operating at Low Speed
By inputting a Jog Command and then a Forward (Reverse) Run Com-
mand, operation is enabled at the jog frequency set in n032. When
multi-step speed references 1, 2, 3 or 4 are input simultaneously with
the Jog Command, the Jog Command has priority.
Constant No. Name Setting
n032 Jog Frequency Factory setting: 6.00 Hz
n050 to n056 Jog References Set to 10 for any constant.
Frequency
reference
FWD (REV) Run/Stop
Multi-step speed ref. 1
(terminal S5)
Multi-step speed ref. 2
(terminal S6)
Multi-step speed ref. 3
(terminal S7)
Time
(n024) 25.0 Hz
(n025) 30.0 Hz
(n026) 35.0 Hz
(n027) 40.0 Hz
(n028) 45.0 Hz
(n029) 50.0 Hz
(n030) 55.0 Hz
(n031) 60.0 Hz
76
Adjusting Speed Setting Signal
The relationship between the analog inputs and the frequency reference
can be set to provide the frequency reference as analog inputs to control
circuit terminal FR or FC.
1. Analog Frequency Reference Gain (n060)
The frequency reference provided when the analog input is 10 V (or
20 mA) can be set in units of 1%. (Max. Output Frequency
n011=100%)
* Factory setting: 100%
2. Analog Frequency Reference Bias (n061)
The frequency reference provided when the analog input is 0 V
(4 mA or 0 mA) can be set in units of 1%. (Max. Output Frequency
n011=100%)
* Factory setting: 0%
Typical Settings
• To operate the Inverter with a frequency reference of 0% to 100%
at an input voltage of 0 to 5 V
Frequency Reference
Max. Output Frequency X GAIN
100
0 V
(4 mA)
(0 mA)
10 V
(20 mA)
(20 mA)
( ) indicates the value when a current
reference input is selected
Max. Output Frequency X BIAS
100
Max. frequency (100%)
Gain n060 = 200
Bias n061 = 0
6 Programming Features
77
• To operate the Inverter with a frequency reference of 50% to
100% at an input voltage of 0 to 10 V
Adjusting Frequency Upper and Lower Limits
• Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033)
Sets the upper limit of the frequency refer-
ence in units of 1%.
(n011: Max. Output Frequency = 100%)
Factory setting: 100%
• Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034)
Sets the lower limit of the frequency reference in units of 1%.
(n011: Max. Output Frequency = 100%)
When operating at a frequency reference of 0, operation is continued
at the frequency reference lower limit.
However, if the frequency reference lower limit is set to less than the
Minimum Output Frequency (n016), operation is not performed.
Factory setting: 0%
Using Four Acceleration/Deceleration Times
* When deceleration to a stop is selected (n005 = 0).
Max. frequency (100%)
Gain n060 = 100
Bias n061 = 50
0 V 10 V
Internal
frequency
reference
Frequency
Upper Limit
(n033)
Frequency
Lower Limit
(n034)
Set frequency reference
Forward (Reverse)
Run Command
Multi-Step
Speed Reference
Accel/Decel
Time Selection 1
Accel/Decel
Time Selection 2
Output
Frequency
Accel
Time 2
(n021)
Accel
Time 1
(n019)
Decel
Time 2
(n022)
Time
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Decel
Time 1
(n020)
Accel
Time 3
(n041)
Accel
Time 4
(n043)
Decel
Time 4*
(n044)
Decel
Time 3*
(n042)
78
By setting a multi-function input selection (any one of n050 to n056) to
11 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) or 27 (acceleration/
deceleration time selection 2), the acceleration/deceleration time is
selected by ON/OFF combinations of acceleration/deceleration time
selection 1 and acceleration/deceleration time selection 2 (terminals S1
to S7).
The combinations of acceleration/deceleration time selection settings
are shown below.
Accleration/
Deceleration
Time Selection 1
Accleration/
Deceleration
Time Selection 2
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
OFF OFF Acceleration time 1
(n019)
Deceleration time 1
(n020)
ON OFF Acceleration time 2
(n021)
Deceleration time 2
(n022)
OFF ON Acceleration time 3
(n041)
Deceleration time 3
(n042)
ON ON Acceleration time 4
(n043)
Deceleration time 4
(n044)
No. Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n019 Acceleration Time 1 Depends on
n018 setting.
(See the next
table.)
Depends on
n018 setting.
(See the next
table.)
10.0 s
n020 Deceleration Time 1 10.0 s
n021 Acceleration Time 2 10.0 s
n022 Deceleration Time 2 10.0 s
n041 Acceleration Time 3 10.0 s
n042 Deceleration Time 3 10.0 s
n043 Acceleration Time 4 10.0 s
n044 Deceleration Time 4 10.0 s
6 Programming Features
79
n018 Settings
Note: Constant n018 can be set while stopped.
If a value exceeding 600.0 s is set for the acceleration/deceleration time
when n018=0 (in units of 0.1 s), 1 cannot be set for n018.
• Acceleration time
Set the time needed for the output frequency to reach 100% from 0%.
• Deceleration time
Set the time needed for the output frequency to reach 0% from 100%.
(Max. Output Frequency n011 = 100%)
Momentary Power Loss Ridethrough Method (n081)
When continuous operation after power recovery is
selected, stand clear of the Inverter or the load. The
Inverter may restart suddenly after stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warn-
ing may result in injury.
When constant n081 is set to 1 or 2, operation automatically restarts
even if a momentary power loss occurs.
No. Unit Setting Range
n018 0 0.1 s 0.0 to 999.9 s (999.9 s or less)
1 s 1000 to 6000 s (1000 s or more)
1 0.01 s 0.00 to 99.99 s (99.99 s or less)
0.1 s 100.0 to 600.0 s (100 s or more)
Setting*3 Description
0Continuous operation after momentary power
loss not enabled.
1*1 Continuous operation after power recovery
within momentary power loss ridethrough time
0.5 s
2*1, *2 Continuous operation after power recovery
(Fault output not produced.)
WARNING
80
* 1. Hold the operation signal to continue operation after recovery from a
momentary power loss.
* 2. When 2 is selected, the Inverter restarts if power supply voltage recovers
while the control power supply is held.
No fault signal is output.
S-curve Selection (n023)
To prevent shock when starting and stopping the machine, acceleration/
deceleration can be performed using an S-curve pattern.
Note: 1. S-curve characteristics are not supported for simple positioning con-
trol, so use a set value of 0.
2. The S-curve characteristic time is the time from acceleration/deceler-
ation rate 0 to the normal acceleration/deceleration rate determined by
the set acceleration/deceleration time.
The following time chart shows switching between FWD/REV run
when decelerating to a stop.
Setting S-curve Selection
0 S-curve characteristic not provided.
1 0.2 s
2 0.5 s
3 1.0 s
Frequency
Reference Output
Frequency
Time
S-curve Characteristic Time (Ts)
Output
Frequency
Forward Run Command
Reverse Run Command
Acceleration
Output Frequency Min. Output
Frequency n016
S-curve Characteristics in
Acceleration Deceleration
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop
n090
Deceleration
Min. Output Frequency
n016
6 Programming Features
81
Torque Detection
If an excessive load is applied to the machine, an increase in the output
current can be detected to output an alarm signal to multi-function out-
put terminal MA, MB, P1, or P2.
To output an overtorque detection signal, set one of the output terminal
function selections n057 to n059 for overtorque detection (Setting: 6
(NO contact) or 7 (NC contact)).
* The overtorque detection release width (hysteresis) is set at approx. 5% of
the Inverter rated current.
Overtorque Detection Function Selection 1 (n096)
1. To detect overtorque during acceleration/deceleration, set n096 to 3 or 4.
2. To continue operation after overtorque detection, set n096 to 1 or 3.
During detection, the Digital Operator will display an alarm
(flashing).
3. To stop the Inverter and generate a fault at overtorque detection, set n096
Setting Description
0 Overtorque detection not provided.
1 Detected during constant-speed running. Oper-
ation continues after detection.
2 Detected during constant-speed running. Oper-
ation stops during detection.
3 Detected during running. Operation continues
after detection.
4 Detected during running. Operation stops dur-
ing detection.
Motor Current
Multi-function Output Signal
(Overtorque Detection Signal)
Terminal MA, MB, P1, or P2
Time
82
to 2 or 4. At detection, the Digital Operator will display an fault
(ON).
Overtorque Detection Level (n098)
Set the overtorque detection current level in units of 1%. (Inverter rated
current = 100%) When detection by torque is selected, the motor rated
torque becomes 100%.
Factory setting: 160%
Overtorque Detection Time (n099)
If the time that the motor current exceeds the Overtorque Detection
Level (n098) is longer than Overtorque Detection Time (n099), the
overtorque detection function will operate.
Factory setting: 0.1 s
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function Selection 2
(n097)
When vector control mode is selected, overtorque/undertorque detec-
tion can be performed either by detecting the output current or the out-
put torque.
When V/f control mode is selected, the setting of n097 is invalid, and
overtorque/undertorque is detected by the output current.
Frequency Detection Level (n095)
Effective when one or more of the Multi-function Output Selections
n057, n058 and n059 are set for frequency detection (setting: 4 or 5).
Frequency detection turns ON when the output frequency is higher or
lower than the setting for the Frequency Detection Level (n095).
Frequency Detection 1
Output frequency ≥ Frequency Detection Level n095
Setting Description
0 Detected by output torque
1 Detected by output current
6 Programming Features
83
(Set n057, n058 or n059 to 4.)
Frequency Detection 2
Output frequency ≤ Frequency Detection Level n095
(Set n057, n058 or n059 to 5.)
Frequency Detection
Level [Hz] (n095)
Output
Frequency
Frequency
Detection
Signal
Release
Width
−2Hz
Release
Width
+2Hz Frequency
Detection
Level (Hz)
(n095)
Output
Frequency
Frequency
Detection
Signal
84
Jump Frequencies (n083 to n086)
This function allows the prohibition or “jumping” of critical frequencies
so that the motor can operate without resonance caused by the machine
system. This function is also used for dead band control. Setting the val-
ues to 0.00 Hz disables this function.
Set prohibited frequencies 1, 2, and 3 as follows:
Operation is prohibited within the jump frequency ranges.
However, the motor will operate without jumping during acceleration/
deceleration.
Continuing Operation Using Automatic Retry Attempts (n082)
When the fault retry function is selected, stand clear of
the Inverter or the load. The Inverter may restart sud-
denly after stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warn-
ing may result in injury.
The Inverter can be set to restart and reset fault detection after a fault
occurs. The number of self-diagnosis and retry attempts can be set to up
to 10 in n082. The Inverter will automatically restart after the following
faults occur:
OC (overcurrent)
OV (overvoltage)
The number of retry attempts is cleared to 0 in the following cases:
1. If no other fault occurs within 10 minutes after retry
2. When the Fault Reset signal is ON after the fault is detected
3. When the power supply is turned OFF
Output Frequency
Frequency Reference
n083 ≥ n084 ≥ n085
If this condition is not satisfied,
the Inverter will display fo
r
one second and restore the
data to initial settings.
WARNING
6 Programming Features
85
Frequency Offset Selection (n146)
An offset frequency (which can be set with a constant) can be added to
or subtracted from the frequency reference using multi-function inputs.
Constant
No.
Name Description Factory
Setting
n083 Jump Frequency 1
(Offset Frequency 1)
1st digit of n146 is 0 or 1:
Setting unit: 0.01 Hz
Setting range: 0.00 to
400.0 Hz
1st digit of n146 is 2:
Setting unit: 0.01%
Setting range: 0.00% to
100.0% (Percentage of Maxi-
mum Output Frequency)
0.00 Hz
n084 Jump Frequency 2
(Offset Frequency 2)
1st digit of n146 is 0 or 1:
Setting unit: 0.01 Hz
Setting range: 0.00 to
400.0 Hz
1st digit of n146 is 2:
Setting unit: 0.01%
Setting range: 0.00% to
100.0% (Percentage of Maxi-
mum Output Frequency)
0.00 Hz
n085 Jump Frequency 3
(Offset Frequency 3)
1st digit of n146 is 0 or 1:
Setting unit: 0.01 Hz
Setting range: 0.00 to
400.0 Hz
1st digit of n146 is 2:
Setting unit: 0.01%
Setting range: 0.00% to
100.0% (Percentage of Maxi-
mum Output Frequency)
0.00 Hz
86
• If the 1st digit “x” of Frequency Offset Selection (n146) is 0 (fre-
quency offsets disabled), the set values of constants n083 to n085
will function as jump frequencies.
n146 Frequency Offset Se-
lection
n146 is separated in 2 digits
(n146=xy). The first digit “x”
selects the use of parame-
ters n083 to n085:
n146= 0y:
Disabled (n083 to n085 are
jump frequencies)
n146= 1y:
Enabled (n083 to n085 are
offset frequencies in Hz)
n146= 2y:
Enabled (n083 to n085 are
offset frequencies in per-
cent)
The 2nd digit “y” selects the
sign of the offset frequen-
cies. Refer to the table below
for the possible combina-
tions:
Note: When the 2nd digit of
n146 is changed, the
set values of n083 to
n085 will be initialized
to 0.
0
Constant
No.
Name Description Factory
Setting
y n083 n084 n085
0+++
1−++
2+−+
3−−+
4++−
5−+−
6+−−
7−−−
8−−−
9−−−
6 Programming Features
87
• If the 1st digit “x” of Frequency Offset Selection (n146) is 1 or 2 (fre-
quency offsets enabled), the set values of constants n083 to n085 will
function as frequency offsets.
• In order to activate the offset frequencies 1 to 3 of the Multi-function
Input Selections (n050 to n056) must be programmed to 30, 31 or 33.
Depending on the input status following combinations of the offset
frequencies can be used. Note that the sign specified with “y” is used.
• The enabled offset amount can be monitored on the display of U-12
on the Digital Operator.
Terminal Input Status Final Offset Amount
Offset
Frequency
Input 3
Offset
Frequency
Input 2
Offset
Frequency
Input 1
OFF OFF OFF None
OFF OFF ON n083
OFF ON OFF n084
OFF ON ON n083 + n084
ON OFF OFF n085
ON OFF ON n083 + n085
ON ON OFF n084 + n085
ON ON ON n083 + n084 + n085
Moni-
tor No.
Name Description
U-12 Offset amount 1st digit “x”of n146 = 0: "----" displayed
1st digit “x” of n146 = 1: Display range: −400
to 400.0 Hz
1st digit “x” of n146 = 2: Display range: −
100% to 100.0%
88
The following block diagram illustrates the Frequency Offset Function.
Operating a Coasting Motor without Tripping
To operate a coasting motor without tripping, use the Speed Search
Command or DC Injection Braking at Startup.
Speed Search Command
Restarts a coasting motor without stopping it. This function enables
smooth switching between motor commercial power supply operation
and Inverter operation.
Set a Multi-function Input Selection (n050 to n056) to 14 (Search Com-
mand from maximum output frequency) or 15 (Search Command from
set frequency).
Build a sequence so that a FWD (REV) Run Command is input at the
same time as the Search Command or after the Search Command. If the
Run Command is input before the Search Command, the Search Com-
mand will be disabled.
00
0
0
n146,
right digit
Selected
Frequency
Reference
n083
n084
n085
Frequency
Reference
Upper Limit
n146,
right digit
Jump Frequencies
n085
n084
n083
Frequency
Reference
Lower Limit 400 Hz
Frequency
Reference
(U-01)
n034 x n011
n033 x n011
Frequency Offset
Input 1
Frequency Offset
Input 2
Frequency Offset
Input 3
Offset
Volume
(U-12)
6 Programming Features
89
Time Chart at Search Command Input
The deceleration time for speed search operation can be set in n101.
If the setting is 0, however, an initial value of 2.0 s will be used.
The speed search starts when the Inverter’s output current is greater
than or equal to the speed search operation level (n102).
DC Injection Braking at Startup (n089, n091)
Restarts a coasting motor after stopping it. Set the DC injection braking
time at startup in n091 in units of 0.1 s. Set the DC Injection Braking
Current in n089 in units of 1% (Inverter rated current =100%). When
the setting of n091 is 0, DC injection braking is not performed and
acceleration starts from the minimum output frequency.
When n089 is set to 0, acceleration starts
from the minimum output frequency after
baseblocking for the time set in n091.
Holding Acceleration/Deceleration Temporarily
To hold acceleration or deceleration, input an Acceleration/Decelera-
tion Hold Command. The output frequency is maintained when an
Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command is input during acceleration
or deceleration.
When the Stop Command is input while an Acceleration/Deceleration
Hold Command is being input, the acceleration/deceleration hold is
released and operation coasts to a stop.
Set a Multi-function Input Selection (n050 to n056) to 16 (acceleration/
deceleration hold).
FWD (REV) Run Command
Search Command
Max. Output Frequency or
Frequency Reference at
Run Command Input
Output Frequency
Min. Baseblock
Time (0.5 s)
Speed
Search
Operation
Speed Agreement
Detection
0.5 s Min.
Min. Output
Frequency
n016
DC Injection Braking
Time at Startup
n091
90
Time Chart for Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command
Input
Note: If a FWD (REV) Run Command is input at the same time as an Acceler-
ation/Deceleration Hold Command, the motor will not operate. How-
ever, if the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) is set to a value
greater than or equal to the Min. Output Frequency (n016), the motor
will operate at the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034).
External Analog Monitoring(n066)
Selects to output either output frequency or output current to analog out-
put terminals AM-AC for monitoring.
Note: Enabled only when n065 is set to 0 (analog monitor output).
Setting Description
0 Output frequency
1 Output current
2 Main circuit DC voltage
3 Torque monitor
4 Output power
5 Output voltage reference
6 Frequency reference monitor
7 PID Feedback Amount (10 V/Maxi-
mum Output Frequency in n011)
8 Data Output via Communications
(MEMOBUS register No.0007H)
(10 V/1000)
FWD (REV)
Run Command
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Hold Command
Frequency
Reference
Output
Frequency
Frequency
Agree
Signal
6 Programming Features
91
In factory setting, analog voltage of approx. 10 V is output when output
frequency (output current) is 100 %.
Calibrating Frequency Meter or Ammerter (n067)
Used to adjust analog output gain.
Set the analog output voltage at 100 % of output frequency (output cur-
rent). Frequency meter displays 0 to 60 Hz at 0 to 3 V.
Using Analog Output (AM-AC) as a Pulse Train Signal
Output (n065)
Analog output AM-AC can be used as a pulse train output (output fre-
quency monitor, frequency reference monitor).
Set n065 to 1 when using pulse train output.
Constant No. Name Unit Setting
range
Factory setting
n065 Monitor Output Type - 0, 1 0
FMAM
AC
100 %
10 V
0
Frequency
Meter
Analog monitor gain
can be set by n067.
Analog Output
Output Frequency
(Output Current)
n067 AM
AC
FM
Frequency Meter/Ammeter
(3 V 1 mA Full-scale)
n067 = 1.00
Factory Setting
n067 = 0.30
100 %
10 V3 V
0
Analog Output
Output Frequency
(Output Current)
10 V ×n067 setting
0.30 = 3 V Output frequency becomes
100 % at this value.
92
n065 Setting
Pulse train signal can be selected by setting in n150.
Note: Enabled only when n065 is set to 1 (pulse monitor output).
n065 Setting Description
0 Analog monitor output
1 Pulse monitor output
(Output frequency monitor)
n150 Setting Description
0 Output
frequency
monitor
1440 Hz/Max. frequency (n011)
1 1F: Output frequency × 1
6 6F: Output frequency × 6
12 12F: Output frequency × 12
24 24F: Output frequency × 24
36 36F: Output frequency × 36
40 Frequency
reference
monitor
1440 Hz/Max. frequency (n011)
41 1F: Output frequency × 1
42 6F: Output frequency × 6
43 12F: Output frequency × 12
44 24F: Output frequency × 24
45 36F: Output frequency × 36
50 Data Output
via Communi-
cations
0 to 14,400 Hz output (MEMO-
BUS register No.000AH) (1 Hz/
1)
6 Programming Features
93
At the factory setting, the pulse of 1440 Hz can be output when output
frequency is 100 %.
Peripheral devices must be connected according to the fol-
lowing load conditions when using pulse monitor output.
The machine might be damaged when the conditions are not
satisfied.
Used as a Sourcing Output
Used as a Sinking Input
Output Voltage
VRL (V)
Load Impedance
(kΩ)
+5 V 1.5 kΩ or more
+8 V 3.5 kΩ or more
+10 V 10 kΩ or more
External Power
Supply (V)
+12 VDC ±5 %
or less
Sinking Current
(mA)
16 mA or less
Pulse Monitor Output
Pulse
Output Frequency
1440 Hz
100 %
AM
AC (0 V)
NOTE
VRL
AM
AC (0 V)
Load
Impedance
Sink Current
AM
AC (0 V)
(0 V)
External Power Supply
Load
Impedance
94
Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max
Set the Inverter output transistor switching frequency (carrier fre-
quency).
Note: When the carrier frequency has been set to 14 kHz, use a MEMOBUS
baud rate of 4,800 bps or lower.
Setting Carrier Frequency (kHz) Metallic
Noise from
Motor
Noise and
Current
Leakage
7 12 fout (Hz)
8 24 fout (Hz)
9 36 fout (Hz)
1 2.5 (kHz)
2 5.0 (kHz)
3 7.5 (kHz)
4 10.0 (kHz)
12 14 (kHz)
Higher
Not
audible Larger
Smaller
6 Programming Features
95
If the set value is 7, 8, or 9, the carrier frequency will be multiplied by
the same factor as the output frequency.
fc=12 fout
fc=24 fout
fc=36 fout
fout=Output Frequency
fout=Output Frequency
fout=Output Frequency
fc=Carrier Frequency
fc=Carrier Frequency
fc=Carrier Frequency
n080=7
n080=8
n080=9
2.5 kHz
1.0 kHz
2.5 kHz
1.0 kHz
83.3 Hz 208.3 Hz
41.6 Hz 104.1 Hz
2.5 kHz
1.0 kHz
27.7 Hz 69.4 Hz
96
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity (kVA).
* Reduction of the current is not necessary.
Voltage
Class (V)
Capacity
(kW)
Factory Setting Maximum
Continuous
Output
Current (A)
Reduced
Current
(A)
Continu-
ous Output
Current
(Reduction
Output
Current)
(A)
Setting Carrier
Frequency
(kHz)
FC =
14 kHz
200 V Sin-
gle-phase
or 3-phase
0.1 4 10 0.8
-
0.7 (88%)
0.25 4 10 1.6 1.4 (88%)
0.55 4 10 3.0 2.6 (87%)
1.1 4 10 5.0 4.3 (86%)
1.5 3 7.5 8.0 7.0 6.0 (75%)
2.2 3 7.5 11.0 10.0 8.6 (78%)
4.0 3 7.5 17.5 16.5 14.0 (80%)
5.5 3 7.5 25 23 18.0 (72%)
7.5 3 7.5 33 30 22.1 (67%)
400 V
3-phase
0.37 3 7.5 1.2 1.0 0.8 (67%)
0.55 3 7.5 1.8 1.6 1.28 (71%)
1.1 3 7.5 3.4 3.0 2.2 (65%)
1.5 3 7.5 4.8 4.0 3.2 (67%)
2.2 3 7.5 5.5 4.8 3.84 (70%)
3.0 3 7.5 7.2 6.3 4.9 (68%)
4.0 3 7.5 9.2 8.1 6.4 (74%)
5.5 3 7.5 14.8 * 12.0 (81%)
7.5 3 7.5 18 17 13.0 (72%)
6 Programming Features
97
1. Reduce the continuous output current when changing the
carrier frequency to 4 (10 kHz) for 200 V Class (1.5 kW
or more) and 400 V Class Inverters. Refer to the table
above for the reduced current.
Operation Condition
• Input power supply voltage:
3-phase 200 to 230 V (200 V Class)
Single-phase 200 to 240 V (200 V Class)
3-phase 380 to 460 V (400 V Class)
• Ambient temperature:
−10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)
(Protection structure: open chassis type IP20,
IP00)
−10 to 40°C (14 to 105°F)
(Protection structure: enclosed wall-mounted
type NEMA 1 (TYPE 1))
2. If the wiring distance is long, reduce the Inverter carrier
frequency as described below.
3. Set the Carrier Frequency Selection (n080) to 1, 2, 3, or 4
when using vector control mode. Do not set it to 7, 8, or 9.
4. If the Inverter repeatedly stops and starts with a load
exceeding 120% of the Inverter rated current within a
cycle time of 10 minutes or less, reduce carrier frequency
at a low speed. (Set constant n175 to 1.)
5. The carrier frequency is automatically reduced to 2.5 kHz
when the Reducing Carrier Frequency Selection at Low
Speed (n175) is set to 1 and the following conditions are
satisfied:
Output frequency ≤ 5 Hz
Output current ≥ 110%
Factory setting: 0 (Disabled)
Wiring Distance
between Inverter
and Motor
Up to 50 m Up to 100 m More than 100 m
Carrier Fre-
quency (n080
setting)
10 kHz or less
(n080=1, 2, 3, 4,
7, 8, 9)
5 kHz or less
(n080=1, 2, 7, 8, 9)
2.5 kHz or less
(n080=1, 7, 8, 9)
NOTE
98
6. When a carrier frequency of 14 kHz (n080) is selected,
automatic carrier frequency reduction during low-speed
overcurrent is automatically enabled, even if the Reducing
Carrier Frequency Selection at Low Speed (n175) is set to
0 (disabled).
7. When the carrier frequency is set to 14 kHz, the following
functions will be disabled:
• Fast digital input (START/STOP)
• UP 2/DOWN 2
• Motor overheat protection using PTC thermistor input
• Bi-directional PID output
• Frequency offsets
Operator Stop Key Selection (n007)
The Digital Operator stop button can be disabled by a
setting in the Inverter. Install a separate emergency
stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
Set the processing when the key is pressed during operation
either from a multi-function input terminal or communications.
Setting Description
0 The STOP key is effective either from a multi-
function input terminal or communications. When
the STOP key is pressed, the Inverter stops ac-
cording to the setting of constant n005. At this
time, the Digital Operator displays a alarm
(flashing). This Stop Command is held in the
Inverter until both Forward and Reverse Run
Commands are open, or until the Run Command
from communications goes to zero.
1 The STOP key is ineffective either from multi-
function input terminals or communications.
Important
WARNING
STOP
6 Programming Features
99
Second motor selection
This function switches between two motors for one Inverter. V/f control
must be used for the second motor. Switching is possible from a multi-
function input.
The following constants are used as control constants for motor 2.
Note: Not initialized when constants are initialized.
* 1. Upper limit of setting range and factory setting are doubled for 400-V
Class Inverters.
* 2. Depends on Inverter capacity.
Con-
stant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
−Control Mode Selec-
tion
−V/f control must be
used.
−
n140 Motor 2 Maximum Out-
put Frequency
0.1 Hz 50.0 to 400.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
n158 Motor 2 Maximum
Voltage
0.1 V 0.1 to 255.0 V*1 200.0 V
*1
n147 Motor 2 Maximum
Voltage Output Fre-
quency
0.1 Hz 0.2 to 400.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
n159 Motor 2 Middle Output
Frequency Voltage
0.1 V 0.1 to 255.0 V*1 12.0 V
*1*2
n014 Middle Output
Frequency
0.1 Hz 0.1 to 399.9 Hz 1.3 Hz
n160 Motor 2 Minimum Out-
put Frequency Voltage
0.1 V 0.1 to 50.0 V*1 12.0 V
*1*2
n161 Motor 2 Rated Current 0.1 A 0.0 to 150% of
Inverter rated cur-
rent
*2
n162 Motor 2 Rated Slip 0.1 Hz 0.0 to 20.0 Hz *2
100
Con-
stant
No.
Name Description Fac-
tory
Set-
ting
n057 Multi-function Output
Selection 1
(Contact output ter-
minals MA-MB-MC)
0: Fault
1: Operating
2: Frequency agree
3: Zero speed
4: Frequency detection (≥ Detection
level)
5: Frequency detection (≤ Detection
level)
6: Overtorque detection (NO contact
output)
7: Overtorque detection (NC contact
output)
8: Undertorque detection (NO con-
tact output)
9: Undertorque detection (NC con-
tact output)
10: Minor fault (Alarm is indicated)
11: Base blocked
12: Operating mode
13: Inverter operation ready
14: Fault retry
15: UV
16: Reverse run
17: Speed search
18: Data output from communica-
tions
19: PID feedback loss
20: Frequency reference loss
21: Inverter overheat alert (OH3)
22: Motor selection monitor
0
n058 Multi-function Output
Selection 2
(Open-collector out-
put terminals PHC1-
PHCC)
Same as constant 57 1
n059 Multi-function Output
Selection 3
(Open-collector out-
put terminals PHC2-
PHCC)
Same as constant 57 2
6 Programming Features
101
Note: Switching of motor 1 and motor 2 as well as checking motor status
should be performed using an external sequence.
• By setting one of the constants from n050 to n056 (Multi-function
Input Selections) to 28 (Motor Switching Command) and by opening
and closing the input signal when stopped (i.e. while Inverter output
is OFF when the Run Command is OFF), the control mode, V/f char-
acteristics, and motor constants stored in the Inverter can be selected.
• By setting one of the constants from n057 to n059 (Multi-function
Output Selections) to 22 (Motor Selection Monitor), the present
motor selection status can be monitored on a digital output terminal.
• The following shaded constants are switched for the Motor Switching
Command.
U, V, W
(T2, T2, T3)
M1
M2
IN
IN
Motor Switching
Command (Motor 2
selected when closed.)
Digital input
Digital output
Motor 1 (main motor)
Motor 2 (auxiliary motor)
Motor Selection Monitor
(Motor 2 selected when
closed.)
102
Motor Constant Table (New Parameters are shown in bold letters)
Motor Switching Command
Open
(Motor 1 Selected)
Closed
(Motor 2 Selected)
Control Mode
Selection
n002 V/f control must be used.
V/f
Characteristics
n011: Maximum Output Fre-
quency
n012: Maximum Voltage
n013: Maximum Voltage Output
Frequency
n014: Middle Output Frequency
n015: Middle Output Frequency
Voltage
n016: Minimum Output Frequen-
cy
n017: Minimum Output Frequen-
cy Voltage
n140: Motor 2 Maximum Out-
put Frequency (2)
n158: Motor 2 Maximum Volt-
age
n147: Motor 2 Maximum Volt-
age Output Frequency
(2)
n014: Middle Output Frequency
(Same as motor 1)
n159: Motor 2 Middle Output
Frequency Voltage
n016: Minimum Output Frequen-
cy (Same as motor 1)
n160: Motor 2 Minimum Out-
put Frequency Voltage
Motor Constants n036: Motor Rated Current
n037: Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Selection
n038: Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Time Constant
Setting
n093: Stall Prevention Level dur-
ing Acceleration
n094: Stall Prevention Level dur-
ing Running
n104: Torque Compensation
Time Constant
n105: Torque Compensation
Iron Loss
n106: Motor Rated Slip
n107: Motor Line-to-Neutral Re-
sistance
n108: Motor Leakage Induc-
tance
n110: Motor No-load Current
n111: Slip Compensation Gain
n112: Slip Compensation Time
Constant
n161: Motor 2 Rated Current
n037: Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Selection
(Same as motor 1)
n038: Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Time Constant
Setting (Same as motor 1)
n093: Stall Prevention Level dur-
ing Acceleration (Same as
motor 1)
n094: Stall Prevention Level dur-
ing Running (Same as
motor 1)
n104: Torque Compensation
Time Constant (Same as
motor 1)
n105: Torque Compensation
Iron Loss (Same as motor
1)
n162: Motor 2 Rated Slip
n107: Motor Line-to-Neutral Re-
sistance (Same as motor
1)
n110: Motor No-load Current
(Same as motor 1)
n111: Slip Compensation Gain
(Same as motor 1)
n112: Slip Compensation Time
Constant (Same as motor
1)
6 Programming Features
103
Application Precautions
• Motor Switching Command and Motor Selection Monitor
When using the Motor Switching Command, be sure to switch the
motor when it is at a complete stop (i.e., while Inverter output is OFF
when the Run Command is OFF). Check the status of the Motor Selec-
tion Monitor and contactors M1 and M2 with an external sequence or
sequencer, and start Inverter operation only after confirming that the
motor has been switched. The motor switching process for the Inverter
takes 50 ms max.
If an attempt is made to switch the motor during operation or when the
motor is decelerating to a stop, the switching process will not be per-
formed, a SEr (sequence error) alarm will be displayed, a multi-function
output alarm will be output to the Digital Operator, and operation will
continue. No error will be output. When the motor comes to a complete
stop (i.e., when the Inverter output is OFF), the switching process will
be performed.
• Electronic Thermal Motor Protection (OL1)
Electronic thermal motor protection is performed based on n036 (Motor
Rated Current) when motor 1 is selected and based on n161 (Motor 2
Rated Current) when motor 2 is selected. When a Motor Switching
Command is allocated for a multi-function input terminal, OL1 calcula-
tions for motor 1 and motor 2 are always performed regardless of the
status of the Motor Switching Command input terminal.
Output current detection data for OL1 calculations is provided sepa-
rately for motor 1 and motor 2. (If motor 1 is selected, output current
detection data is calculated for motor 1 with the actual output current,
and output current detection data is calculated for motor 2 with an out-
put current of 0.0 A. If motor 2 is selected, output current detection data
will be calculated for motor 2 with the actual output current, and output
current detection data will be calculated for motor 1 with an output cur-
rent of 0.0 A. If motor 2 is selected, output current detection data will be
calculated for motor 2 with the actual output current, and output current
detection data will be calculated for motor 1 with an output current of
0.0 A.)
Motor Selection
Monitor
Open Closed
Motor Switching Command
Open
(Motor 1 Selected)
Closed
(Motor 2 Selected)
104
If constant n037 is set to 3 (standard motor, motor 1 only) or 4 (special
motor, motor 1 only), however, OL1 calculations for motor 1 will
always be performed, regardless of the status of the Motor Switching
Command. (Regardless of whether motor 1 or motor 2 is selected, out-
put current detection data for motor 1 is calculated with the actual out-
put current, and output current detection data for motor 2 is calculated
with an output current of 0.0 A.)
• Maximum Frequency, Frequency Reference, Acceleration
Time, and Deceleration Time
When motor 1 is selected, operation is performed using n011 (Maxi-
mum Output Frequency) as the maximum frequency. Therefore, when
the set value of the Maximum Output Frequency (n011) and the set
value of the Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency (n140) are different,
operation is as follows:
1. Even when using an analog frequency reference with the same refer-
ence voltage (current), the frequency reference will differ by the
ratio between n011 and n140.
Example: If n011 = 60 Hz and n140 = 50 Hz, when the reference
voltage is 5 V (50%), motor 1 would rotate at 30 Hz and motor 2
would rotate at 25 Hz.
Con-
stant
No.
Name Description Fac-
tory
Set-
ting
n037 Electronic Thermal
Motor Protection Se-
lection
0: Electronic thermal characteristics
for standard motor
1: Electronic thermal characteristics
for special motor
2: No electronic thermal motor pro-
tection
3:Electronic thermal characteristics
for standard motor (motor 1 only)
4: Electronic thermal motor charac-
teristics for special motor (motor 1
only)
0
6 Programming Features
105
2. For a multi-step speed reference, the setting unit is Hz (absolute
value), and so the motor rotates at the commanded value regardless
of the motor selection status.
If a multi-step speed reference exceeding the selected maximum out-
put frequency multiplied by the Frequency Reference Upper Limit
(n033) is mistakenly input, upper limit operation will be performed
at the selected maximum output frequency multiplied by the Fre-
quency Reference Upper Limit (n033).
Example: If n011 = 60 Hz, n140 = 50 Hz, and n033 = 100%, opera-
tion will be at 50 Hz when a multi-step speed reference of 60 Hz is
mistakenly input when motor 2 is selected.
3. Multi-step Speed Reference (n024 to n032) Upper Limit (Setting
Range Upper Limit)
The upper limit is Maximum Output Frequency (n011) for motor 1
or the Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency (n140), whichever is
greater, multiplied by the Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033).
4. The setting values of the Acceleration and Deceleration Times (n019
to n022) are the times required to reach the selected maximum out-
put frequency.
Example: If n011 = 60 Hz, n140 = 50 Hz, and acceleration (deceler-
ation) time = 10 s, motor 1 will accelerate (decelerate) for 5 s and
motor 2 will accelerate (decelerate) for 6 s to reach 30 Hz starting at
0 Hz (or to reach 0 Hz starting at 30 Hz).
Motor 2 Switching Time Chart
Example of Switching Operation from Motor 1 to Motor 2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Motor Switching Command
M1 operation
M2 operation
Contact for
motor
switching
Motor Selection Monitor
FWD (REV) Run Command
50 ms max.
FWD (REV) Run Command is turned ON after checking
the status of M1, M2, and the Motor Selction Monitor.
106
If the FWD/REV Run Command is turned ON after turning the Motor
Switching Command ON (or OFF) but before the Motor Selection Mon-
itor turns ON (or OFF), Inverter output will begin immediately after the
Motor Selection Monitor turns ON (or OFF).
Selecting the Stopping Method
Stopping Method Selection (n005)
Select the stopping method suitable for the application.
Deceleration to a Stop
Example when Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 is selected
* Changing the frequency reference while running
Upon termination of a FWD (REV) Run Command, the motor deceler-
ates at the deceleration rate determined by the time set in Deceleration
Time 1 (n020) and DC injection braking is applied immediately before
stopping. DC injection braking is also applied when the motor deceler-
ates because the frequency reference is set lower than the Min. Output
Frequency (n016) when the FWD (REV) Run Command is ON. If the
deceleration time is short or the load inertia is large, an overvoltage
(OV) fault may occur at deceleration. In this case, increase the decelera-
tion time or install an optional Braking Resistor.
Braking torque: Without braking resistor: Approx. 20% of motor
rating
With braking resistor: Approx. 150% of motor
rating
Setting Description
0 Deceleration to a stop
1 Coast to a stop
Output
Frequency
Acceleration
Time 1
(n019)
Deceleration
Time 1
(n020)
Deceleration
Time 1 (n020)
Time
FWD (REV)
Run
Command
Min. Output Frequency
(Frequency at
DC Injection Braking
Startup) n016
(Factory Setting: 1.5 Hz)
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop (n090)
(Factory Setting: 0.5 s)
6 Programming Features
107
Coast to a Stop
Example when Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 is selected
* Changing the frequency reference while running
Upon termination of the FWD (REV) Run Command, the motor
starts coasting.
Applying DC Injection Braking
DC Injection Braking Current (n089)
Sets the DC injection braking current in units of 1%. (Inverter rated cur-
rent=100%)
DC Injection Braking Time at Stop (n090)
Sets the DC injection braking time at stopping in units of 0.1 s. When
the setting of n090 is 0, DC injection braking is not performed, but the
Inverter output is turned OFF when DC injection braking is started.
When coasting to a stop is specified in the Stopping Method Selection
(n005), DC injection braking is not applied when stopping.
Simple Positioning Control when Stopping
• If a sequence input terminal is used for a RUN/STOP sequence, sim-
ple positioning control when stopping can be used to reduce devia-
tion in the position where the motor stops after the Run Command is
started from the sequence input terminal.
Output
Frequency
Acceleration
Time 1
(n019)
Deceleration
Time 1
(n020) Coast to a
stop
Time
FWD (REV)
Run Command
n016 Min.
Output
Frequency
n090
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop
108
• Controlling the Stop Position Regardless of Output Frequency
Control is performed so that S, the travel distance from maximum
output frequency until decelerating to a stop, and S1, the travel dis-
tance from any frequency (less than maximum output frequency)
until decelerating to a stop, are the same. (Control is performed to
stop at the same position when the Run Command is input from a
sequence input terminal regardless of the output frequency.)
Simple positioning control is not performed if the value of the
Maximum Output Frequency (n011) multiplied by the Decel-
eration Time (n020, n022, n042, or n044) is more than 8,589.
For example, simple positioning control is not performed if
the Deceleration Time is set to 143 s or higher at 60 Hz.
Con-
stant
No.
Name Description Fac-
tory
Set-
ting
n143 Sequence Input Re-
dundant Reading
Selection (Stop Po-
sition Control Selec-
tion)
0: 8-ms redundant reading
(Stop position control disabled.)
1: 2-ms redundant reading with only
stop position deviation reduction
2: 2-ms redundant reading with sim-
ple positioning control
0
n144 Stop Position Con-
trol Compensation
Gain
Setting unit: 0.01
Setting range: 0.50 to 2.55
1.00
Max Output Frequency Max Output Frequency
SPEED
FORWARD RUN
Command
RUN STOP
Tdec
t
Max Output Frequency
SPEED
FORWARD RUN
Command
STOP
RUN
Tdec
t
FORWARD RUN
Command
RUN STOP
Tdec
t
Fig.1 Fig.2
Fig.3
S1
Output Frequency
S
Output Frequency
T1
S1
S-S1
SPEED
NOTE
6 Programming Features
109
Constants Requiring Restrictions
Con-
stant
No.
Name Description Fac-
tory
Set-
ting
n023 S-curve Selection 0: No S-curve Characteristic
1: 0.2-s S-curve Characteristic
2: 0.5-s S-curve Characteristic
3: 1.0-s S-curve Characteristic
Note: S-curve characteristics are not
supported for simple position-
ing control, so use a set value
of 0.
0
n092 Stall Prevention dur-
ing Deceleration
0: Stall prevention
1: No stall prevention (when a brak-
ing resistor is installed)
Note: If Stall Prevention during De-
celeration is used with simple
positioning control, position-
ing will not be performed prop-
erly, so use a set value of 1.
0
110
Building Interface Circuits with External Devices
Using Input Signals
The functions of multi-function input terminals S1 to S7 can be changed
as necessary by setting constants n050 to n056. The same value cannot
be set for more than one of these constants.
Setting Name Description Ref.
page
0 FWD/REV Run Command
(3-wire sequence selection)*1
Setting enabled only for n052
(terminal S3)
112
1 Forward Run Command
(2-wire sequence selection)*1
64
2 Reverse Run Command
(2-wire sequence selection)*1
64
3 External fault
(NO contact input)
Inverter stops for an external
fault signal input. Digital
Operator displays EFo.*2
-
4 External fault
(NC contact input)
-
5 Fault Reset Resets a fault. Fault Reset not
effective when the RUN sig-
nal is ON.
66
6 Multi-step speed reference 1 66
7 Multi-step speed reference 2 66
8 Multi-step speed reference 3 66
9 Multi-step speed reference 4 66
10 Jog Command 75
11 Acceleration/deceleration
time selection 1
77
12 External Baseblock,
NO contact input
Motor coasts to a stop for this
signal input. Digital Operator
displays .
-
13 External Baseblock,
NC contact input
-
6 Programming Features
111
14 Search Command from maxi-
mum frequency
Speed Search Command sig-
nal
88
15 Search Command from set
frequency
88
16 Acceleration/Deceleration
Hold Command
89
17 LOCAL/REMOTE selection 63
18 Communications/control cir-
cuit terminal selection
115
19 Emergency stop fault,
NO contact input
Inverter stops for an emergen-
cy stop signal input according
to the Stopping Method Selec-
tion (n005). When coast to
stop (n005 = 1) is selected,
the Inverter coasts to stop.
Digital Operator displays
(flashing).
-
20 Emergency stop alarm,
NO contact input
-
21 Emergency stop fault,
NC contact input
-
22 Emergency stop alarm,
NC contact input
-
23 PID control cancel 167
24 PID integral reset 167
25 PID integral hold 167
26 Inverter overheat alert
(OH3 alarm)
When the Inverter overheat
signal turns ON, (flash-
ing) is displayed at the Digital
Operator.
-
27 Acceleration/deceleration
time selection 2
77
28 Motor Switching Command
(Motor Selection)
99
29 Bi-directional PID prohibit
(ON: Prohibited)
163
30 Frequency offset input 1 85
31 Frequency offset input 2 85
32 Frequency offset input 3 85
Setting Name Description Ref.
page
112
* 1. For more information on how to select the sequence polarity, refer to page
226.
* 2. Numbers 1 to 7 are displayed for to indicate the terminal numbers S1 to
S7.
Factory Settings
Terminal Functions for 3-wire Sequence Selection
When 0 is set for terminal S3 (n052), terminal S1 is the Run Command,
terminal S2 is the Stop Command, and terminal S3 is the FWD/REV
Run Command.
33 no function -
34 UP/DOWNcommands setting enabled only for n056 114
35 to
36
Do not set. -
37 FWD/REV Run 2 Command
(2-wire sequence 2)
129
No. Terminal Factory Setting Function
n050 S1 1 Forward Run Command
(2-wire sequence)
n051 S2 2 Reverse Run Command
(2-wire sequence)
n052 S3 3 External fault (NO contact input)
n053 S4 5 Fault Reset
n054 S5 6 Multi-step speed reference 1
n055 S6 7 Multi-step speed reference 2
n056 S7 10 Jog Command
Setting Name Description Ref.
page
Run Command
(Run when Closed)
Stop Command
(Stop when Open)
FWD/REV Run Selection
FWD Run When Open
REV Run When Closed
RUN SW
(NO Contact)
STOP SW
(NC Contact)
V7AZ
6 Programming Features
113
To select the 3-wire sequence, set terminal S3 (n052)
to 0.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection (Setting: 17)
Select the operation reference from either the Digital Operator or from
the settings of the Run Command Selection (n003) and Frequency Ref-
erence Selection (n004). The LOCAL/REMOTE Selection can be used
only when stopped.
Open: Run according to the setting of Run Command Selection
(n003) or Frequency Reference Selection (n004).
Closed: Run according to the frequency reference and Run Command
from the Digital Operator.
Example: Set n003=1, n004=2, n008=0.
Open: Run according to the frequency reference from multi-function
input terminal FR and Run Command from multi-function
input terminals S1 to S7.
Closed: Run according to the potentiometer frequency reference and
Run Command from the Digital Operator.
Up/Down Commands (Setting: n056 = 34)
When the FWD (REV) Run Command is ON, acceleration/deceleration
is enabled by inputting the UP or DOWN signal from multi-function
input terminals S6 and S7 without changing the frequency reference.
Operation can thus be performed at the desired speed. When Up/Down
Commands are specified in n056, any function set in n055 is disabled,
terminal S6 is the input terminal for the Up Command, and terminal S7
is the input terminal for the Down Command.
Multi-function Input Termi-
nal S6 (Up Command)
Closed Open Open Closed
Multi-function Input Termi-
nal S7 (Down Command)
Open Closed Open Closed
Operation Status Acceler-
ation
Decel-
eration
Hold Hold
WARNING
114
Time Chart for Up/Down Command Input
Note: 1. When Up/Down Commands are selected, the upper limit speed is set
regardless of frequency reference.
Upper limit speed = Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
× Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033)/100
2. Lower limit value is either the Minimum Output Frequency (n016) or
the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) (whichever is larger.).
3. When the FWD (REV) Run Command is input, operation starts at the
lower limit speed without using the Up/Down Commands.
4. If the Jog Command is input while running for an Up/Down Com-
mand, the Jog Command has priority.
5. Multi-step speed references 1 to 4 are not effective when an Up/Down
Command is selected.
6. When 1 is set for the HOLD Output Frequency Memory Selection
(n100), the output frequency can be recorded during HOLD.
Setting Description
0 Output frequency is not recorded during
HOLD.
1 When HOLD status is continued for 5 seconds
or longer, the output frequency during HOLD
is recorded and the Inverter restarts at the re-
corded frequency.
FWD Run
Up Command S6
Down Command S7
Upper Limit Speed
Lower Limit Speed
Output Frequency
Frequency Agree
Signal
U = Up (accelerating) status
D = Down (decelerating) status
H = Hold (constant speed) status
U1 = Up status, clamping at upper limit speed
D1 = Down status, clamping at lower limit speed
6 Programming Features
115
Communications/Control Circuit Terminal Selection
(Setting: 18)
Operation can be changed from communications commands, or from
control circuit terminal or Digital Operator commands.
Run Commands from communications and the frequency reference are
effective when the multi-function input terminal for this setting is
closed (register No. 0001H, 0002H).
Run Commands in LOCAL/REMOTE mode and the frequency refer-
ence are effective when the terminal is open.
Up/Down Command 2 (Setting: n056 = 36)
This function works like standard Up/Down commands but with addi-
tional functionallity:
No. Name Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n056 Multi-function Input
Selection S7
When n056=36 is selected,
the Up/Down 2 function is
allocated to S6(Up) and
S7(Down). Setting of n055
has no effect.
1 to 37 10
n045 Frequency
reference bias step
amount
(Up/Down2)
0: Bias value increase/
decrease by ramp time (n019/
020 or n043/044) dependent
on n046.
>0: When Up/Down 2 (S6/S7)
is switched, bias value is
increased/decreased by the
value of n045.
0.00 to
99.99
Hz
0Hz
n046 Frequency Refer-
ence Bias
Accel/Decel Rate
during Up/Down 2
Selection of Accel/Decel time
rate.
0: Accel/Decel time 1
(n019/n020)
1: Accel/Decel time 4
(n043/n044)
0, 1 0
n047 Operation after
removing Up/Down
command 2
only effective for n045 and
n100=0
0: Bias value will be held
1: Bias value will be reset to
previous frequency reference
0, 1 0
116
n048 Frequency Refer-
ence Bias value
of Up/Down
command 2
100% =max. frequency (n011)
Bias value is stored in n048
when Up/Down 2 command is
completed.
n048 is limited by setting of
n171 and n172.
The setting of n048 has no
effect under following condi-
tions:
• Up/Down 2 function is not
selected (n056 <> 36)
• Frequency reference
method is changed (n004
setting)
• n100 is changed from 0 to 1
• n100=0 and Run signal is
OFF
• When n045= 0 and n047= 1
and S6/S7 are both set ON
or OFF
• Max. frequency (n011) is
changed
-99.9 to
100.0%
0.0%
n049 Analogue Frequen-
cy Reference Fluc-
tuation Limit, Up/
Down command 2
If analogue reference (or
pulse train) value change is
bigger than value of n049,
bias value is cleared.
0.1 to
100.0%
1.0%
n171 Frequenc Refer-
ence Bias upper
limit, Up/Down
command 2
The Up/Down 2 bias value is
limited by n171 (upper limit)
Limit is fixed to:
Fref + (Fmax x n171) / 100
0.0 to
100%
0.0%
n172 Frequenc Refer-
ence Bias lower
limit, Up/Down
command 2
The Up/Down 2 bias value is
limited by n172 (lower limit)
Limit is fixed to:
Fref - (Fmax x n172) / 100
-99.9 to
0.0%
0.0%
n100 Hold output fre-
quency saving se-
lection
Selects if bias value is saved
to EEPROM after RUN signal
is removed (frequency must
be hold for more than 5s).
0: not saved to EEPROM.
1: saved to EEPROM
0, 1 0
U-19 Frequency Refer-
ence Bias monitor
Displays the frequency offset
caused by Up/Down com-
mand 2
-99.99
to
100%
-
No. Name Description Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
6 Programming Features
117
If n045 > 0 the frequency reference is changed in steps of n045 value
For n045=0, acceleration / deceleration rate is selected by n046:
n046 = 0: Accel/Decel time 1 time (n019 / n020)
n046 = 1: Accel/Decel time 4 (n043 / n044)
Saving of the Up/Down 2 bias to the EEPROM if save mode n100=1 is
selected (Frequency reference has to remain for 5 sec)
S6
Fref
S7
n045 Reference changes
according to setting in n045
S6
S7
Fref
Deceleration rate,
sel. by n046
Acceleration rate ,
sel. by n046
n100 = 1
5 sec
5 sec
Up 2 /Down 2 bias is saved,
when Run signal is removed
Up 2/ Down 2 bias is not saved,
when Run signal is removed
S6
S7
Fref
118
Up/Down Command 2, Examples
Up/Down Command 2 by time
n056 = 36 Up/Down command 2 on S6 / S7
n003 = 1 Run command source is digital input
n004 = 1 Main frequency reference input is n024
n045 = 0 Frequency reference bias is changed by time
n046 = 1 Use Acceleration / Deceleration time 4
n047 = 0 Bias value is held if S6, S7 are both ON or OFF
n100 = 1 Bias value is saved to EEPROM
)
FREF
Frequency reference
is stored
into n024 and Fref
bias is cleared
FOUT is stored
into n 024 and Fref
bias is cleared
n024 (35Hz) n 024 ( 25 H z)
5s
n024
(25 Hz n 025 = 40H zn 025 (10 Hz)
Frequency reference
5s
Time
1
Decel 1
Accel 1
Decel 4
Decel 1 Accel 4
Decel
30
RUN command
UP 2 Command
DOW N2 Command
Multi-step s peed
command
-10Hz
FOUT (Hz)
10Hz
Hz
35Hz
40Hz
Fref bias, by
Up2/Down2
(n048 )
25Hz
6 Programming Features
119
Up/Down Command 2 by step
n056 = 36 Up/Down command 2 on S6 / S7
n003 = 1 Run command source is digital input
n004 = 1 Main frequency reference input is n024
n045 = 5.00Hz Frequency reference bias is changed by step
n046 = 1 Use Acceleration / Deceleration time 4
n047 not active
n100 = 1 Bias value is saved to EEPROM
2
.
.
Multi-step speed
command
Frequency referenc e is
stored into n 024 and
FREF bias is cleared
Frequency referenc e is
stored into n 025 and
FREF bias is cleared
n 025 ( 10Hz)
Accel 4
RUN command
UP 2 Command
DOW N2 Command
FOUT (Hz)
n 024 (35 Hz)
30Hz
(n 024 =25 Hz) (n 025= 40H z)
n024 (25Hz)
Accel 1
Decel 4
TIME
-10Hz
n045
5 sec
5s
Decel 1
Decel 1
Decel 1
FOUT FREF
FREF bias, by
Up2/Down
(n048 )
10H z
35H z
40H z
25H z
120
Up/Down Command 2 by time and return to original frequency
reference when S6, S7 = OFF
n056 = 36 Up/Down command 2 on S6 / S7
n003 = 1 Run command source is digital input
n004 = 1 Main frequency reference input is n024
n045 = 0 Frequency reference bias is changed by time
n046 = 1 Use Acceleration / Deceleration time 4
n047 = 1 Bias value is held if S6, S7 are both ON or OFF
n100 = 1 Bias value is saved to EEPROM
Using the Multi-function Analog Inputs (n077, n078, n079)
The input analog signal (0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA) for the CN2 terminal
of the JVOP-140 Digital Operator can be used as an auxiliary function
for the master frequency reference input to the control circuit terminals
(FR or RP). Refer to the block diagram on page 167 for details on the
input signal.
When using the signal for the CN2 terminal of the JVOP-140
Digital Operator as a multi-function analog input, never use it
for the target value or the feedback value of PID control.
RUN command
UP2 Command
DOWN2 Command
Multi-step speed
command
FOUT (Hz)
n 024 ( 35 Hz)
10H z
35H z
n 025 (10 Hz) n 024 ( 35 H z)
Accel 1
Decel 4
Decel 1
Accel 4
TIME
Accel 1
Decel 1
Accel 1
Decel 1
NOTE
6 Programming Features
121
Multi-function Input Selection (n077)
No. Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n077 Multi-function Input Selection - 0 to 4 0
122
n077 Settings
Setting Function Description
0 Disabled The multi-function input is disabled.
1 Auxiliary frequency
reference (FREF2)
When frequency reference 2 is select-
ed using the multi-step speed referenc-
es, the input analog signal for the CN2
terminal will be the frequency refer-
ence. The n025 setting will be invalid.
Note: Set the Frequency Reference Gain in
n068 or n071, and the Frequency Ref-
erence Bias in n069 or n072.
2 Frequency refer-
ence gain (FGAIN)
Set the FGAIN to constant n060 or
n074 and the FBIAS to constant n061
or n075 for the master frequency refer-
ence. Then, multiply the resulting fre-
quency reference by the FGAIN.
3 Frequency refer-
ence bias (FBIAS)
Set the FGAIN to constant n060 or
n074 and the FBIAS to constant n061
or n075 for the master frequency refer-
ence.
Then, add the FBIAS to the resulting
frequency reference.
The amount of the FBIAS to be added
is set to n079.
4 Output voltage bias
(VBIAS)
Add the VBIAS to the output voltage af-
ter V/f conversion.
6 Programming Features
123
Analog Input Level
Multi-function Analog Input Signal Selection (n078)
Frequency Reference Bias Setting (n079)
1. Auxiliary Frequency Reference
(n077=1)
2. Frequency Reference Gain
(n077=2)
3. Frequency Reference Bias (n077=3) 4. Output Voltage Bias (n077=4)
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n078 Multi-function
Analog Input Signal
Selection
- 0=Digital Operator terminal
(voltage: 0 to 10 V)
1=Digital Operator terminal
(current: 4 to 20 mA)
0
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n079 Frequency
Reference
Bias Setting
1 % 0 to 50
100 %/Max. Output Frequency
(n011)
10
100%
0%
0 V
(4 mA)
100%=Max. Output Frequency (n011)
10 V
(20 mA)
FREF2
2.00
1.00
00 V
(4 mA)
5 V 10 V
(20 mA)
FGAIN
n079
-n079
0 % 0 V
(4 mA)
5 V 10 V
(20 mA)
FBIAS
100 V
0 V
0 V
(4 mA)
10 V
(20 mA)
VBIAS
The VBIAS value to be added is
doubled for 400 V Class Inverters.
124
Using Output Signals (n057, n058, n059)
The functions of multi-function output terminals MA, MB, P1 and P2
can be changed as necessary by setting constants n057, n058, and n059.
• Terminal MA and MB functions: Set in n057
• Terminal P1 function: Set in n058
• Terminal P2 function: Set in n059
Setting Name Description Ref.
page
0 Fault Closed when Inverter fault occurs. -
1 Operating Closed when either FWD/REV Run
Command is input or voltage is output
from the Inverter.
-
2 Frequency agree Closed when the set frequency agrees
with Inverter output frequency.
125
3 Zero speed Closed when Inverter output frequency
is less than minimum output frequency.
-
4 Frequency detection 1 Output frequency ≥ Frequency Detec-
tion Level (n095)
82
5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency ≤ Frequency Detec-
tion Level (n095)
82
6 Overtorque detection,
NO contact output
-81
7 Overtorque detection,
NC contact output
-81
8 Undertorque detected,
NO contact output
-185
9 Undertorque detected,
NC contact output
-185
10 Minor fault Closed when an alarm has been de-
tected.
-
11 Base blocked Closed when the Inverter output is
OFF.
-
12 Operating mode Closed when LOCAL is selected for the
LOCAL/REMOTE selection.
-
13 Inverter operation
ready
Closed when an Inverter fault is not de-
tected, and operation is ready.
-
14 Fault retry Closed during fault retries. -
15 UV Closed when undervoltage is detected. -
6 Programming Features
125
Factory Settings
• Frequency Agree Signal (setting=2)
16 Reverse run Closed during reverse run. -
17 Speed search Closed when Inverter conducts a
speed search.
-
18 Data output from com-
munications
Operates multi-function output termi-
nal independently from Inverter opera-
tion
(by MEMOBUS communication)
141
19 PID feedback loss Closed during PID feedback loss. 163
20 Frequency reference
loss
Closed during frequency reference
loss.
183
21 Inverter overheat alert Closed during Inverter overheat alert. 111
22 monitor motor selection closed during select motor 2 -
No. Terminal Factory Setting
n057 MA, MB 0 (fault)
n058 P1 1 (operating)
n059 P2 2 (frequency agree)
Setting Name Description Ref.
page
Detection Width
±2 Hz
Release Width
±4 Hz
Output Frequency
Frequency Agree Signal
126
Setting Frequency by Current Reference Input
Never input a voltage reference to control circuit terminal FR
when DIP switch SW2 is switched to the “I” side. The
Inverter might be damaged.
VI
SW2
SW2
When setting the frequency by
inputting a current reference (4 to
20 mA or 0 to 20 mA) from the
control circuit terminal FR, switch
the DIP switch SW2 on the con-
trol circuit board to the “I” side.
NOTE
6 Programming Features
127
Current Reference Selection
After changing the DIP switch (V-I switch of SW2) to the “I” side,
press on the Digital Operator, then set the following constants.
Current reference (4 to 20 mA): constant n004 = 3
Current reference (0 to 20 mA): constant n004 = 4
• Setting: n003 = 0
• Setting: n003 = 1
Frequency reference gain (n060)/bias (n061) can be set even when cur-
rent reference input is selected. For details, refer to Adjusting Speed
Setting Signal on page 76.
Press the Digital Operator keys to run
or stop the Inverter. Switch FWD and
REV run by setting the F/R LED.
Set the frequency by the analog cur-
rent signal [0 % to 100 % (max. fre-
quency)/4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA]
connected to the control circuit termi-
nals.
Switch run/stop and FWD/REV run
with switching device connected to the
control circuit terminal.
Multi-function input terminals S1 and
S2 are set to Forward run/stop
(n050=1) and Reverse run/stop
(n051=2) respectively.
Set frequency by the analog current
signal [0 % to 100 % (max. frequen-
cy)/4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA] con-
nected to the control circuit terminal.
PRGM
FS
FR
FC
IM
Current
Reference
4 to 20 mA
or
0 to 20 mA
(n004 = 3 or 4
S1
S2
SC
FS
FR
FC
IM
Current
Reference
4 to 20 mA
or
0 to 20 mA
(n004 = 3 or 4)
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
128
Frequency Reference by Pulse Train Input
Frequency reference can be set by pulse train input from the control cir-
cuit terminals.
• Input pulse specifications
• Low-level voltage: 0.8 V or less
• High-level voltage: 3.5 to 32 V
• H duty: 30 % to 70 %
• Pulse frequency: 0 to 33 kHz
• Frequency reference method
Frequency reference is a value obtained by multiplying the ratio of
the maximum input pulse frequency and actual input pulse fre-
quency by the maximum output frequency.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n003 Run Command Selection - 0 to 3 0
n004 Frequency Reference
Selection
- 0 to 9 1
n149 Pulse Train Input Scaling 1=10
Hz
100 to 3300
(33 kHz)
2500
(25 kHz)
Reference
frequency
Input pulse frequency Maximum output
frequency (n011)
Maximum pulse train frequency (n149) × 10
=×
IM
S1
S2
RP
FC
SC
Run/stop and FWD/REV run can be
selected by a switch connected
to the multi-function input.
[Set S1 and S2 to FWD run/stop
(n050 = 1) or REV run/stop (n051 = 2).]
Set the frequency by a pulse train
input signal [0 % to 100 %
(maximum frequency)/0 to 33 kHz]
from the control circuit terminal.
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
Pulse
Reference
Device
6 Programming Features
129
Two-wire Sequence 2
Additional to the standard 2-wire or 3-wire sequence a new 2-wire
sequence 2 is available which features a FWD/REV Run 2 Command
(setting 37 for one of the Multi-function Input Selection 1 to 7, con-
stants n050 to n056).
Whenever this FWD/REV Run 2 Command is programmed to one of
the Multi-function Digital Inputs, it switches between forward (ON) and
reverse (OFF) operation, while the standard FWD Run Command (set
value 1 for n050 to n056) works as a RUN/STOP command (i.e. it starts
and stops the inverter operation).
An “ERR” alarm will be displayed when it is tried to set the REV Run
Command (set value: 2) and the FWD/REV Run 2 Command (set value:
37) simultaneously. If this is attempted via communications, constant
setting error message "oP8" will be displayed, and operation will not be
possible.
The following time chart shows the operation of the traditional 2-wire
and 3-wire sequences and the operation of 2-wire sequence 2.
1. Traditional 2-wire Sequence:
Multi-function Input Selection 1 (constant n050): 1
Multi-function Input Selection 2 (constant n051): 2
Multi-function Input Selection 3 (constant n052): Not 0
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
FWD Run
Output frequency
REV Run
S1 terminal: FWD Run Command
S2 terminal: REV Run Command
130
2. Three-wire Sequence
Multi-function input selection 1 (constant n050): 1 (Any setting)
Multi-function input selection 2 (constant n051): 2 (Any setting)
Multi-function input selection 3 (constant n052): 0
3. Two-wire Sequence 2 (Special Specifications):
Multi-function input selection 1 (constant n050): 1
Multi-function input selection 2 (constant n051): 37
Multi-function input selection 3 (constant n052): Not 0
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
FWD Run FWD Run
REV Run
Output frequency
S1 terminal:
Run Command
S2 terminal:
Stop Command
S3 terminal:
FWD/REV Run
Command
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
FWD Run
REV Run
Output frequency
S1 terminal:
Run/Stop Command
S2 terminal:
FWD/REV Run 2 Command
6 Programming Features
131
Preventing the Motor from Stalling (Current
Limit)
This function automatically adjusts the output frequency and output cur-
rent according to the load to continue operation without stalling the
motor.
Stall Prevention (Current Limit) Level during Acceleration
(n093)
Sets the stall prevention (current limit) level during acceleration in units
of 1%. (Inverter rated current = 100%)
Factory setting: 170%
A setting of 200% disables the stall prevention (current limit) during
acceleration. If the output current exceeds the value set for n093 during
acceleration, acceleration stops and the frequency is maintained. When
the output current goes to the value set for n093, acceleration starts.
In the constant output area (output frequency > Max. Voltage Output
Frequency (n013)), the stall prevention (current limit) level during
acceleration is automatically decreased using the following equa-
tion.
*1: Stops the acceleration to prevent the motor
from stalling.
*2: Release width (hysteresis) of stall
prevention during acceleration is approx. 5% of
inverter rated current.
Motor Current
Time
Time
*1
*2
n093
Output
Frequency
Stall prevention during accel. in constant output area
Stall Prevention Level During Accel.(n093) Max. Voltage Output Freq.(n013)
Output frequency
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
×
=
132
Stall Prevention (Current Limit) Level while Running (n094)
Sets the stall prevention (current limit) level while running in units of
1%. (Inverter rated current = 100%)
Factory setting: 160%
A setting of 200% disables stall prevention (current limit) while run-
ning.
If the stall prevention action current at speed agreement exceeds the
value set for n094 for longer than 100 ms, deceleration starts.
If the output current exceeds the value set for n094, deceleration contin-
ues. If the output current goes to the value set for n094, acceleration to
the set frequency starts.
Stall prevention acceleration/deceleration settings during operation are
set either for the currently selected Acceleration Time, i.e., for Acceler-
ation Time 1 (n019) and Deceleration Time 1 (n020), or for Accelera-
tion Time 2 (n021) and Deceleration Time 2 (n022).
Stall Prevention Level During
Acceleration (n093)
Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration (40% of n093)
Output Frequency
Stall Prevention Level
during Acceleration
Maximum Voltage
Output Frequency
n013
*
1
: Decreases the frequency to prevent the mo
from stalling.
*
2
: At the start of acceleration, the output curr
e
hysterisis is approx. 5% of Inverter rated
current.
Motor Current
Time
Time
*1
*2
n094
Output
Frequency
100 ms
6 Programming Features
133
Stall Prevention during Operation
Stall Prevention above Base Speed during Run (n115)
The stall prevention level can be decreased automatically in the constant
output range.
n115 Settings
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection during Stall Pre-
vention (n116)
With this function, Acceleration Time 2 (n021) and Deceleration Time
2 (n022) can be fixed as the acceleration/deceleration time when mov-
ing to prevent stalling during operation.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n115 Stall Prevention above
Base Speed during Run
- 0=Disabled
1=Enabled
0
Setting Function
0 The stall prevention level is the level set for constant n094
in all frequency areas.
1 The following figure shows how the stall prevention level is
automatically decreased in the constant output range
(Max. frequency > Max. Voltage Output Frequency
(n013)).
The lower limit is 40% of the set value of n094.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n116 Acceleration/Deceleration
Time Selection during
Stall Prevention
- 0=Disabled
1=Enabled
0
Constant Output Area
Operation Level
n094
40% of n094
n013 Output Frequency
Lower Limit
n094 Max. Voltage Output Frequency n013
Operation Level
Output Frequency
134
n116 Settings
• Stall Prevention during Deceleration (n092)
To prevent overvoltage during deceleration, the Inverter automati-
cally extends the deceleration time according to the value of the
main circuit DC voltage. When using an optional braking resistor,
set n092 to 1.
Note: If Stall Prevention during Deceleration is used with simple positioning
control, positioning will not be performed properly, so use a set value of
1.
Setting Function
0 Standard Selection Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 or 2.
1 Automatic Selection Acceleration/Deceleration Time 2
(n021, n022).
Setting Stall Prevention during
Deceleration
0 Provided
1 Not provided (with braking
resistor mounted)
Controls the deceleration
time to prevent overvoltage.
Time
Set
Decel
Time
Frequency
6 Programming Features
135
Decreasing Motor Speed Fluctuation
Slip Compensation (n002 = 0)
As the load becomes larger, the motor speed is reduced and the motor
slip value is increased. The slip compensating function controls the
motor speed at a constant value even if the load varies.
When the Inverter output current is equal to the Motor Rated Current
(n036), the compensation frequency is added to the output frequency.
Related Constants
* Depends on Inverter capacity. (Refer to pages 245 and 246.)
Note: 1. Slip compensation is not performed under the following condition:
Output frequency < Minimum Output Frequency (n016)
2. Slip compensation is not performed during regeneration.
3. Slip compensation is not performed when the Motor Rated Current
(n036) is set to 0.0 A.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n036 Motor Rated Current 0.1 A 0% to 150% of In-
verter rated current
*
n111 Slip Compensation Gain 0.1 0.0 to 2.5 0.0
n110 Motor No-load Current 1% 0% to 99%
(100%=Motor Rated
Current n036)
*
n112 Slip Compensation Time
Constant
0.1 s 0.0 to 25.5 s
When 0.0 s is set,
delay time is 2.0 s.
2.0 s
n106 Motor Rated Slip 0.1 Hz 0.0 to 20 Hz *
Compensation Frequency Motor Rated Slip (n106)
Motor Rated Slip (n106) Motor No-load Current (n110)–
Motor Rated Current (n036) Motor No-load Current (n110)–
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SlipCompensationGain n110()×
×
=
136
Motor Protection
Motor Overload Detection
The V7AZ protects against motor overload with a built-in electronic
thermal overload relay.
Motor Rated Current (Electronic Thermal Reference Current,
n036)
Set the rated current value shown on the motor nameplate.
Note: Setting n036 to 0.0 A disables the motor overload protective function.
Motor Overload Protection Selection (n037, n038)
The electronic thermal overload function monitors the motor tempera-
ture based on Inverter output current and time to protect the motor from
overheating. When the electronic thermal overload relay is enabled, an
error occurs, and the Inverter output is turned OFF to prevent
excessive overheating in the motor. When operating with one Inverter
connected to one motor, an external thermal relay is not needed. When
operating more than one motor with one Inverter, install a thermal relay
on each motor.
General-purpose Motors and Inverter Motors
Induction motors are classified as general-purpose motors or Inverter
motors based on their cooling capabilities. The motor overload function
operates differently for these two motor types.
n037
Setting
Electronic Thermal Characteristics
0 For general-purpose motor
1 For Inverter motor
2 Electronic thermal overload protection not provided.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n038 Electronic Thermal
Motor Protection
Time Constant Set-
ting
1 min 1 to 60 min 8 min
6 Programming Features
137
Example for 200 V Class Motors
Cooling Effect Torque Characteristics Electronic
Thermal Over-
load
Effective
when operat-
ed at 50/60 Hz
from commer-
cial power
supply
Base Frequency 60 Hz
(V/f for 50 Hz, 220 V Input Voltage)
For low-speed operation, torque
must be limited in order to stop mo-
tor temperature rise.
An er-
ror (motor over-
load protection)
occurs when
continuously
operated at 50/
60 Hz or less at
100% load.
Effective even
when operat-
ed at low
speed (ap-
prox. 6 Hz)
Base Frequency 60 Hz
(V/f for 50 Hz, 220 V Input Voltage)
Use an Inverter motor for continuous
operation at low speed.
Electronic ther-
mal overload
protection is
not activated
even for contin-
uous operation
at 50/60 Hz or
less at a 100%
load.
General-purpose
Torque
(%)
60 s
Short-term
Continuous
rating
Operation Frequency (Hz)
50
Inverter Motor
Torque
(%)
60 s
Short-term
Continuous
rating
Operation Frequency (Hz)
50
138
PTC Thermistor Input for Motor Overheat Protection
Motor protection is performed using the temperature-resistance charac-
teristics of the positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistor, which
is embedded in the coil for each motor phase.
The following graph shows the characteristics of the PTC temperature-
resistance value.
The voltage across the ends of three PTC thermistors connected in
series is input to an analog input terminal (FR), and motor OH alarms
and motor OH errors are detected according to the voltage in respect to
the temperature-resistance characteristics of the PTC thermistor.
After a motor OH alarm is detected (FR input > 0.94 V), operation con-
tinues according to the n141 Motor Overheat Operation Selection (and
the OH8 indicator on the Digital Operator will flash).
After a motor error is detected (FR input > 1.87 V), the motor stops
according to the n141 Motor Overheat Operation Selection (and the
OH9 indicator on the Digital Operator will flash).
1330
550
Class F Class H
Tr − 5 Tr Tr + 5 Tr' Temperature
Resistance (Ω)
Tr: Temperature Threshold
Varies depending on the PTC type, but
the resistance value is nearly the same.
For example Tr = Class F, 150°C
Tr' = Class H, 180°C
6 Programming Features
139
Note: When the analog signal (0 to 10 V) input into terminal FR is used as the
motor overheat signal for the PTC thermistor input (FR) (when n141 is
set to 1 or higher), the signal cannot be used as a frequency reference or
for PID feedback. (There are restrictions when setting constants.)
The following settings cannot be set from the Digital Operator. (After
the error is displayed on the Digital Operator, the value returns to the
value before the change.)
If the following settings are set from the MEMOBUS, a constant setting
error will occur. (oP7 will flash on the Digital Operator.)
Con-
stant
No.
Name Description Fac-
tory
Set-
ting
n141 PTC Thermistor In-
put Motor Overheat
Protection Selection
0: No overheat protection with PTC
thermistor input (FR)
1 or higher: Overheat protection with
PTC thermistor input (FR)
Note:
oH8 / oH9 alarm: User can select the
inverter decelerate to a stop or not.
1: Only oH8 alarm, not to a stop.
2: oH8 alarm, and decelerate to a
stop (oH9 fault output).
3: oH8 alarm, and decelerate to a
stop (oH9 fault output) using n022
(Deceleration Time 2) decelera-
tion time
4: oH8 alarm, and coasting to a stop
(oH9 fault output) .
5: not oH8 alarm, and decelerate to
a stop (oH9 fault output).
6: not oH8 alarm, and decelerate to
a stop (oH9 fault output) using
n022 (Deceleration Time 2) decel-
eration time.
7: not oH8 alarm, and coasting to a
stop (oH9 fault output).
0
n142 Motor Temperature
Input Filter Time
Constant
Setting Unit: 0.1 s
Setting Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s
0.2
sec
140
• When n141 is set to 1 or higher:
n004 (Frequency Reference Selection) cannot be set to 2, 3, or 4 (fre-
quency reference of 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, or 0 to 20 mA, respec-
tively).
When n128 (PID Control Selection) is set to a value other than 0
(with PID control), n164 (PID Feedback Value Selection) cannot be
set to 0, 1, or 2 (feedback values of 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, or 0 to
20 mA, respectively).
• Constant n141 cannot be set to 1 when n004 is set to 2, 3, or 4, and
n128 is set to 1 and n164 is set to 0,1, or 2.
Terminal Connection Diagram of PTC Thermistor Input Motor Over-
heat Protection
+V (+12 V)
FR
(0 to 10 V:
20 kΩ)
FC
MA
MB
MC
P1
P2
PC
SW2
OFF
V
ON
I
Multi-function
input
Voltage divider,
18 kΩ
PTC thermistor
Multi-function
output
Multi-function
output PHC
Note: When performing motor overheat
protection using the PTC
thermistor input, be sure to set the
V-I switch (SW2) on the DIP switch
on the control circuit board to V.
6 Programming Features
141
Selecting Cooling Fan Operation
In order to increase the life of the cooling fan, the fan can be set to oper-
ate only when Inverter is running
n039 = 0 (Factory setting): Operates only when Inverter is running
(Continues operation for 1 minute after
Inverter is stopped.)
=1: Operates with power ON.
Using MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications
Serial communication is available with V7AZ using a programmable
controller (MEMOCON series) and MEMOBUS (MODBUS). Refer to
the MEMOBUS Instruction Manual (Manual No.: TOEZ-C736-70.1)
for details of communications.
MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications
The MEMOBUS system is composed of a single master (PLC) and
slaves (1 to 31 V7AZ units).
Communication between master and slave (serial communication) is
controlled according to the master program with the master initiating
communication and the slave responding.
The master sends a signal to one slave at a time. Each slave has a pre-
registered address number, and the master specifies the number and
conducts signal communications. The slave receives the communica-
tions to carry out designated functions and reply to the master.
OMRON PLC
V7AZ
Example of RS-485
communication
V7AZ V7AZ
142
Communications Specifications
Communications Connection Terminal
Use the following S+, S-, R+ and R- terminals for MEMOBUS commu-
nications. Change the termination resistor as shown below.
At RS-422, RS-485 communications: Turn ON SW2 ON/OFF switch of
only the Inverter at the termina-
tion viewed from the PLC.
Note: 1. Separate the wiring for communication from the
main circuit wiring or other power lines.
2. Use shielded cables for communication wiring;
connect the shielded sheath to the ground terminal
and terminate the other end to prevent it from
being connected (to prevent noise malfunction).
3. When communication is performed through RS-
485, connect S+ and R+, S- and R- terminals outside the Inverter as
shown at the right.
Interface RS-422, RS-485
Synchronization Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communication
Parameters
Baud rate: Selected from 2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Parity: Selected from even/odd/none
Stop bits: 1 bit fixed
Communication
Protocol
MEMOBUS (MODBUS) (RTU mode only)
Max. Number of
Inverters That Can Be
Connected
31 (When using RS-485)
RS-422A
or RS-485
S+
SW2
SW1
I
SW2
PNP
NPN
OFF ON
V
S-
R+
R+ R- FS FR FCS5 S6 S7 P1 P2
S1 S2 S3 S4 SC PC S+ S- AM AC RP
R-
SW2 ON/OFF Switch
Terminal Resistor (1/2 W, 120 Ω)
S-
R-
PC
P2 R+
S+
6 Programming Features
143
Procedure for Communications with PLC
The following shows the procedure for communications with a PLC.
1. Connect the communication cable between the PLC and the V7AZ
with the power supply turned OFF.
2. Turn the power ON.
3. Set the constants (n151 to n157) required for communication by
using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn the power OFF once to verify that the Digital Operator displays
have been completely erased.
5. Turn the power ON again.
6. Communications with the PLC starts.
Setting Constants Necessary for Communication
Communication related constants must be set for PLC communication.
Constants n151 to n157 cannot be set by communication. Always set
them before performing communication.
Constant Name Description Factory
Setting
n003 Run Command
Selection
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminals
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Communications card (optional)
0
n004 Frequency Refer-
ence Selection
0: Potentiometer (Digital Operator)
1: Frequency reference 1 (n024)
2: Control circuit terminals (voltage 0 to 10 V)
3: Control circuit terminals (current 4 to 20 mA)
4: Control circuit terminals (current 0 to 20 mA)
5: Pulse train
6: MEMOBUS communication (register No. 0002H)
7: Operator circuit terminals CN2(voltage 0 to 10 V)
8: Operator circuit terminals CN2(current 4 to 20 mA)
9: Communication card (optional)
0
n151 MEMOBUS
Timeover Detec-
tion Monitors
Transmission
Time between
Receiving the
Correct Data from
the PLC.
(Timeover: 2 s)
0: Timeover detection (coast to a stop)
1: Timeover detection (decelerates to a stop with
speed deceleration time 1)
2: Timeover detection (decelerates to a stop with
speed deceleration time 2)
3: Timeover detection (continuous operation, warning
display)
4: Timeover detection not provided
0
n152 MEMOBUS
Frequency
Reference and
Frequency
Monitor Unit
0: 0.1 Hz
1: 0.01 Hz
2: 30000/100 % (30000=max.output frequency)
3: 0.1 %
0
144
* The slave does not respond to the command from the master when set to 0.
Monitoring run status from the PLC, setting/referencing of constants,
Fault Reset and multi-function input reference can be done regardless of
Run Command or frequency reference selection.
Multi-function input reference from the PLC becomes OR with input
commands from S1 to S7 multi-function input terminals.
Message Format
• Slave address: Inverter address (0 to 32)
Setting to 0 indicates simultaneous broadcasting. The
Inverter does not respond to the command from the mas-
ter.
n153 MEMOBUS Slave
Address
Setting range: 0 to 32* 0
n154 MEMOBUS BPS
Selection
0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
2
n155 MEMOBUS Parity
Selection
0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
2: No parity
2
n156 Transmission
Waiting Time
Setting range: 10 ms to 65 ms
Setting unit: 1 ms
10 ms
n157 RTS Control 0: RTS control
1: No RTS control (RS-422A: 1-to-1 communication)
0
For communications, the master (PLC) sends a
command to the slave (V7AZ) and the slave re-
sponds to it. The configuration for sending and re-
ceiving is as shown to the right. The length of the
data varies according to the contents of commands
(functions).
The interval between messages must be main-
tained at the following amount.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
Constant Name Description Factory
Setting
PLC - V7AZ PLC - V7AZ
t (s)
V7AZ - PLC
10 ms or more
n156 setting 24 bits
24 bits
Reference Message Reference Message
Response Message
6 Programming Features
145
• Function code: Command codes (See below.)
• Data: Composes a series of data by combining holding register numbers
(test codes for loop-back numbers) and their data. Data length
depends on the contents of the command.
• Error check: CRC-16 (Calculate the value by the following method.)
1. The default value at calculation of CRC-16 is normally 0. In the
MEMOBUS system, change the default to 1 (all to 16-bit).
2. Calculate CRC-16 assuming that the loop address LSB is MSB and
the last data MSB is LSB.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for a response message from the slave and
refer it to CRC-16 in the response message.
• Read Out Holding Register Contents (03H)
Reads out the contents of the specified number of continuous hold-
ing registers. The contents of each holding register is divided into
the upper 8 bits and the lower 8 bits. They become the data items in
the response message in numerical order.
Func-
tion
Code
Hexa-
decimal
Function Reference Message Response Message
Minimum
(Bytes)
Maximum
(Bytes)
Minimum
(Bytes)
Maximum
(Bytes)
03H Reading holding
register contents
88737
08H Loop-back test 8888
10H Write in several
holding registers
11 41 8 8
146
Example:
Reads out the status signal, fault contents, data link status, and fre-
quency reference from the V7AZ (slave 2).
* Twice as much as the number of the reference message.
• Example of Loop-back Test (08H)
A reference message is returned as a response message without
being changed. This function is used to check communication
between the master and the slave. Any arbitrary values can be used
for test codes or data.
Example: Loop-back test of V7AZ (slave 1)
Reference Message Response Message
(at Normal Operation)
Response Message
(at Fault Occurrence)
Slave address 02H Slave address 02H Slave address 02H
Function code 03H Function code 03H Function code 83H
Start
number
Upper 00H Number of data* 08H Error code 03H
Lower 20H First
holding
register
Upper 00H
CRC-16
Upper F1H
Quantity Upper 00H Lower 65H Lower 31H
Lower 04H Next
holding
register
Upper 00H
CRC-16 Upper 45H Lower 00H
Lower F0H Next
holding
register
Upper 00H
(For error code 03H, refer
to page 157.)
Lower 00H
Next
holding
register
Upper 01H
Lower F4H
CRC-16
Upper AFH
Lower 82H
Reference Message Response Message
(at Normal Operation)
Response Message
(at Fault Occurrence)
Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H
Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H
Test
code
Upper 00H Test
code
Upper 00H Error code 01H
Lower 00H Lower 00H CRC-16 Upper 86H
Data Upper A5H Data Upper A5H Lower 50H
Lower 37H Lower 37H
CRC-16 Upper DAH CRC-16 Upper DAH
Lower 8DH Lower 8DH
6 Programming Features
147
• Writing to Several Holding Registers (10H)
Specified data are written into the several specified holding registers
from the specified number, respectively. Written data must be
arranged in a reference message in the order of the holding register
numbers: from upper eight bits to lower eight bits.
Example:
Set forward run at frequency reference 60.0 Hz to slave 1 V7AZ from
the PLC.
Reference Message Response Message
(at Normal Operation)
Response Message
(at Fault Occurrence)
Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H
Function code 10H Function code 10H Function code 90H
Start
number
Upper 00H Start
number
Upper 00H Error code 02H
Lower 01H Lower 01H CRC-16 Upper CDH
Quantity Upper 00H Quantity Upper 00H Lower C1H
Lower 02H Lower 02H
Number of data* 04H CRC-16 Upper 10H
First
data
Upper 00H Lower 08H
Lower 01H
Next
data
Upper 02H
Lower 58H
CRC-16
Upper 63H
Lower 39H
* Sets twice as large as the actual number.
148
Data
• Reference Data (available to read out/write in)
Regis-
ter No. Bit Description
0000H Reserved
0001H
0 Run Command 1: Run 0: Stop
1 Reverse Run Command 1: Reverse run 0: Forward run
2 External fault 1: Fault (EFO)
3 Fault Reset Command 1: Reset Command
4 Multi-function input reference 1 (Function selected by n050)
5 Multi-function input reference 2 (Function selected by n051)
6 Multi-function input reference 3 (Function selected by n052)
7 Multi-function input reference 4 (Function selected by n053)
8 Multi-function input reference 5 (Function selected by n054)
9 Multi-function input reference 6 (Function selected by n055)
A Multi-function input reference 7 (Function selected by n056)
B-F (Not used)
0002H Frequency reference (unit: n152)
0003H V/f gain (1000/100 %) Setting range: 2.0 to 200.0 %
0004H-
0006H Reserved
0007H
Analog output terminal AM output setting
Setting range: 0 to 1100
[0 to 11 V output/0 to 1100 (when Monitor Gain (n067) = 1.00)]
Note: Enabled only when n065 is set to 0 (analog monitor output) and
n066 is set to 8 (data output via communications).
0008H Reserved
0009H
0Multi-function output reference 1
(Effective when n057=18)
(1: MA ON, 0: MA OFF)
1Multi-function output reference 2
(Effective when n058=18)
(1: P1 ON, 0: P1 OFF)
2Multi-function output reference 3
(Effective when n059=18)
(1: P2 ON, 0: P2 OFF)
3-F (Not used)
6 Programming Features
149
Note: Write in “0” for an unused bit. Never write in data for the reserved reg-
ister.
* Codes that cannot be expressed on 7-segment LEDs will be displayed as
"−".
000AH Pulse train output terminal AM output setting
Setting range: 0 to 14400
(0 to 14,400 Hz output/0 to 14400 [set in 1-Hz increments])
Note: Enabled only when n065 is set to 1 (pulse monitor output) and n150
is set to 50 (data output via communications).
000BH
PLC alarm/error setting
0 PLC alarm 1 1: PLC alarm 1 (PA1 flashes on Dig-
ital Operator)
1 PLC alarm 2 1: PLC alarm 2 (PA2 flashes on Dig-
ital Operator)
2 PLC error 1 1: PLC error 1 (PE1 displayed on
Digital Operator)
3 PLC error 2 1: PLC error 2 (PE2 displayed on
Digital Operator)
4-F (Not used)
000C
H
Digital Operator
0-6 Digital Operator 7-segment LED 1st digit display data (ASCII)
7-D Digital Operator 7-segment LED 2nd digit display data (ASCII)
E-F (Not used)
000D
H
Digital Operator
0-6 Digital Operator 7-segment LED 3rd digit display data (ASCII)
7-D Digital Operator 7-segment LED 4th digit display data (ASCII)
E-F (Not used)
000EH
,
001FH
Reserved
Regis-
ter No. Bit Description
150
• Simultaneous Broadcasting Data (available only for write in)
Bit signals not defined as the broadcast operation signals are used as
the local station data signals.
• Monitor Data (available only for read out)
Register
No. Bit Description
0001H
0 Run Command 1: Run 0: Stop
1 Reverse Run Command 1: Reverse run 0: Forward run
2 (Not used)
3 (Not used)
4 External fault 1: Fault (EFO)
5 Fault Reset Command 1: Fault Reset
6-F (Not used)
0002H
Frequency reference 30000/100 % fixed unit
(Data is converted into 0.01 Hz inside the Inverter, and fractions
are rounded off.)
Register
No. Bit Description
0020H
Status signal
0 Run Command 1: Run 0: Stop
1 Reverse Run Command 1: Reverse run 0: Forward run
2 Inverter operation ready 1: Ready 0: Not ready
3 Fault 1: Fault
4 Data setting error 1: Error
5 Multi-function output 1 (1: MA ON 0: MA OFF)
6 Multi-function output 2 (1: P1 ON 0: P1 OFF)
7 Multi-function output 3 (1: P2 ON 0: P2 OFF)
8-F (Not used)
6 Programming Features
151
0021H
Fault description
0 Overcurrent (OC)
1 Overvoltage (OV)
2 Inverter overload (OL2)
3 Inverter overheat (OH)
4(Not used)
5(Not used)
6 PID feedback loss (FbL)
7 External fault (EF, EFO), Emergency stop (STP)
8 Hardware fault (FXX)
9 Motor overload (OL1)
A Overtorque detection (OL3)
B Undertorque detection (UL3)
C Power loss (UV1)
D Control power fault (UV2)
E MEMOBUS communications timeover (CE)
F Operator connection fault (OPR)
0022H
Data link status
0 Data write in
1(Not used)
2(Not used)
3 Upper/lower limit fault
4 Consistency fault
5-F (Not used)
0023H Frequency reference (unit: n152)
0024H Output frequency (unit: n152)
0025H-
0026H (Not used)
0027H Output current (10/1 A)
0028H Output voltage reference (1/1 V)
Register
No. Bit Description
152
0029H
Fault description
0(Not used)
1(Not used)
2 Input open phase (PF)
3 Output open phase (LF)
4-F (Not used)
002AH
Alarm description
0 Operation function stop (STP)
1 Sequence error (SER)
2 Simultaneous FWD/REV Run Commands (EF)
3 External Baseblock (BB)
4 Overtorque detection (OL3)
5 Cooling fan overheat (OH)
6 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
7 Main circuit undervoltage (UV)
8 Cooling fan fault (FAN)
9 Communications fault (CE)
A Option card communications error (BUS)
B Undertorque (UL3)
C Inverter overheat alert (OH3)
D PID feedback loss (FBL)
E Emergency stop (STP)
F Communications waiting (CAL)
002BH
Sequence input status
0 Terminal S1 1: Closed 0: Open
1 Terminal S2 1: Closed 0: Open
2 Terminal S3 1: Closed 0: Open
3 Terminal S4 1: Closed 0: Open
4 Terminal S5 1: Closed 0: Open
5 Terminal S6 1: Closed 0: Open
6 Terminal S7 1: Closed 0: Open
7-F (Not used)
Register
No. Bit Description
6 Programming Features
153
002CH
Inverter status
0 Run 1: Run
1 Zero-speed 1: Zero-speed
2 Frequency agreed 1: Agreed
3 Minor fault (Alarm is indicated)
4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ (n095)
5 Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency ≥ (n095)
6 Inverter operation ready 1: Ready
7 Undervoltage detection 1: Undervoltage detection
8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
9Frequency reference mode 1: Other than communications
0: Communications
ARun Command mode 1: Other than communications
0: Communications
B Overtorque detection 1: Detection or overtorque fault
CUndertorque detection 1: Detection or undertorque
fault
D Fault retry
EFault (Including MEMOBUS communications timeover)
1: Fault
F MEMOBUS communications timeover 1: Timeover
002DH
Multi-function
output
0 MA 1: ON 0: OFF
1 P1 1: ON 0: OFF
2 P2 1: ON 0: OFF
3-F (Not used)
002EH
Inverter
Status
0 Frequency reference loss 1: Frequency reference loss
1-F (Not used)
002FH-
0030H Reserved
0031H Main circuit DC voltage (1/1 V)
0032H Torque monitor (1/1 %; 100 %/Motor rated torque; with sign)
0033H-
0036H (Not used)
0037H Output Power (1/1 W: with sign)
Register
No. Bit Description
154
0038H PID feedback value (100 % /Input equivalent to max. output frequency;
10/1 %; without sign)
0039H PID input value (±100 %/±Max. output frequency; 10/1 %; with sign)
003AH PID output value (±100 %/±Max. output frequency; 10/1 %; with sign)
003BH-
003CH Reserved
003DH
Communications error
0 CRC error
1 Data length fault
2(Not used)
3 Parity error
4 Overrun error
5 Framing error
6 Timeover
7(Not used)
003EH-
00FFH Reserved
0075H
Analog input terminal FR input value
(0.0% to 100.0%/0 to 10 V input,
0.0% to 100.0%/4 to 20 mA input,
0.0% to 100.0%/0 to 20 mA input)
0076H Pulse train input terminal RP input value
(1 Hz/1)
0077H Digital Operator potentiometer input value
(0.0% to 100.0%/Minimum to Maximum)
0078H Digital Operator terminal CN2-1 (voltage input) input value
(0.0% to 100.0%/0 to 10 V input)
0079H Digital Operator terminal CN2-2 (current input) input value
(0.0% to 100.0%/4 to 20 mA input)
007AH
Digital Operator key input
status
0(Not used)
1 The DATA/ENTER key is being pressed.
2 The UP key is being pressed.
3 The DOWN key is being pressed.
4 The RUN key is being pressed.
5 The STOP/RESET key is being pressed.
6-F Not used (always 0)
Register
No. Bit Description
6 Programming Features
155
* Communications error contents are saved until Fault Reset is input.
(Reset is enabled during run.)
Storing Constants [Enter Command] (can be written only.)
When a constant is written from the PLC by communications, the con-
stant is written to the constant data area on the RAM in the V7AZ. The
Enter Command is a command to write the constant data on the RAM to
the non-volatile memory in the V7AZ. This Enter Command is exe-
cuted when data, regardlesss of the value, is written to register number
0900H. With the factory setting, an Enter Command is accepted only
while the Inverter is stopped. By changing constant n170, an Enter
Command can be accepted even while the Inverter is running.
While the constant is being stored after an Enter Com-
mand was issued, response to the commands or data
input with the keys on the Digital Operator (JVOP-140)
becomes poor. Be sure to take some measures for an
emergency stop by using the external terminals (setting
the external terminal to Run Command priority, or set-
ting the multi-function input terminal to external fault,
External Baseblock or emergency stop).
Maximum number of writing times of the non-volatile mem-
ory used for V7AZ is 100,000; do not execute the Enter Com-
mand excessively.
When a constant is changed from the Digital Operator, the constant data
on the RAM is written to the non-volatile memory without the Enter
Command.
Register
No.
Name Contents Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0900H Enter
Command
Write in constant data to non-
volatile memory (EEPROM)
0000H to
FFFFH
-
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n170 Enter Command opera-
tion selection (MEMOBUS
communications)
-0, 1 0
CAUTION
NOTE
156
Register number 0900H is used only for write-in. If this register is read-
out, a register number error (error code: 02H) occurs.
n170
Setting
Description
0 Accepts the Enter Command (constant saving) while the
Inverter is stopped.
1 Always accepts the Enter Command (constant storing).
The new constant becomes valid even if the Enter Com-
mand is not input. If the Enter Command is not used, how-
ever, the value returns to the stored value when the power
supply is turned ON again.
6 Programming Features
157
Error code
* Refer to the constants list for constants that can be changed during opera-
tion.
Error
Code Contents
01H Function code error
• Function code from PLC is other than 03H, 08H, or 10H.
02H
Improper register number
• No register numbers to be accessed have been registered.
• Enter Command “0900H” (an exclusive-use register for write-in)
was read out.
03H
Improper quantity
• The number of data items to be read or written-in is not in the
range between 1 and 16.
• The number of data items in a message is not the value obtained
by multiplying the quantity by two in the write-in mode.
21H
Data setting error
• A simple upper/lower limit error occurred with control data or con-
stant write-in.
• A constant setting error occurred when a constant was written.
22H
Write-in mode error
• Attempt to write in a constant from PLC was made during run-
ning.*
• Attempt to write in an Enter Command from PLC was made dur-
ing running (n170=0).
• Attempt to write in a constant from PLC was made during UV
occurrence.
• Attempt to write in an Enter Command from PLC was made dur-
ing UV occurrence.
• Attempt to write in a constant other than n001=12, 13 (constant
initialization) from PLC was made during “F04” occurrence.
• Attempt to write in a constant from PLC was made while data
were being stored.
• Attempt to write in data exclusive for read-out from PLC was
made.
158
Performing Self-test
V7AZ is provided with a function to perform self-diagnosis for opera-
tion check of the serial communication I/F circuit. This function is
called self-test. In the self-test, connect the sending terminal with the
receiving terminal in the communication section. It checks if the data
received by V7AZ is not being changed. It also checks if the data can
be received normally.
Carry out the self-test in the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the V7AZ power supply. Set constant n056 to 35 (self-
test).
2. Turn OFF the V7AZ power supply.
3. Make the following wiring with the power supply turned OFF.
4. Turn the power ON.
Normal operation: Operator displays frequency reference value.
Faulty operation: Operator displays , fault signal is turned ON and
Inverter ready signal is turned OFF.
R-
P2P1 R+
S7
S4 SC S-
PC S+
(Note: Select NPN side for SW1.)
6 Programming Features
159
Using PID Control Mode
For details on the PID control settings, refer to the block diagram of the
Inverter’s internal PID control or the block diagram of the Operator ana-
log speed reference.
PID Control Selection (n128)
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n128 PID Control Selection - 0 to 8 0
Setting Function PID Output
Characteristics
0 Disabled. -
1 Enabled: Deviation is subject to derivative control. Forward
2 Enabled: Feedback signal is subject to derivative control.
3 Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and devia-
tion are subject to derivative control.
4 Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and feed-
back signal are subject to derivative control.
5 Enabled: Deviation is subject to derivative control. Reverse
(Reverse the
PID output.)6 Enabled: Feedback signal is subject to derivative control.
7 Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and devia-
tion are subject to derivative control.
8 Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and feed-
back signal are subject to derivative control.
160
Set one of the above values when using PID control.
The following table shows how to determine the target value and the
feedback value to be input when PID control is enabled.
Note: 1. When selecting a frequency reference from the control circuit termi-
nal FR as the target or feedback value, the V-I switch of SW2 on the
control circuit board must be selected depending on the input method
(current or voltage input).
2. Never use the frequency reference from the control circuit terminal
FR for both the target and feedback values. The frequency reference
for both the target value and the feedback value becomes the same.
Example:
When the frequency reference from the control circuit terminal FR,
with a voltage of 0 to 10 V, is selected as the target value and n004=2,
and when at the same time the frequency reference from the control
circuit terminal FR, with a current of 4 to 20 mA, is selected as the
feedback value and n164=1, the feedback value will be set as the fre-
quency reference from the control circuit terminal FR with a voltage
of 0 to 10 V.
Input Condition
Target
Value
The currently selected
frequency reference
Determined by the Frequency Reference
Selection (n004).
When LOCAL mode is selected, the target
value is determined by the Frequency Ref-
erence Selection in Local Mode (n008).
When multi-step speed references are se-
lected, the currently selected frequency
reference will be the target value.
Feedback
Value
The frequency reference
that is set in the PID
Feedback Value Selec-
tion (n164)
-
n164 Setting Description
0 Control circuit terminal FR, Voltage: 0 to 10 V
1 Control circuit terminal FR, Current: 4 to 20 mA
2 Control circuit terminal FR, Current: 0 to 20 mA
3 Operator terminal, Voltage: 0 to 10 V
4 Operator terminal, Current: 4 to 20 mA
5 Pulse train
6 Programming Features
161
3. When using an analog signal (0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA) input to the CN2
terminal of the JVOP-140 Digital Operator as the target or feedback
value of PID control, do not use it as a multi-function analog input.
Constant n077 (Multi-function Analog Input Function) must be set to
0 (disabled in this case).
Proportional Gain (P), Integral Time (I), Derivative Time (D)
(n130, n131, n132)
Adjust the response of the PID control with the proportional gain (P),
integral time (I), and derivative time (D).
Optimize the responsiveness by adjusting the constants while operat-
ing an actual load (mechanical system). Any control (P, I, or D) that
is set to zero will not operate.
Upper Limit of Integral (I) Values (n134)
Constant n134 prevents the calculated value of integral control from
exceeding a specific amount. There is normally no need to change the
setting.
Reduce the setting if there is a risk of load damage, or of the motor
going out of step by the Inverter’s response when the load suddenly
changes. If the setting is reduced too much, the target value and the
feedback value will not match.
Set this constant as a percentage of the maximum output frequency with
the maximum frequency as 100%.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n130 Proportional Gain (P) 0.1 0.0 to 25.0 1.0
n131 Integral Time (I) 0.1 s 0.0 to 360.0 1.0
n132 Derivative Time (D) 0.01 s 0.00 to 2.50 0.00
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n134 Upper Limit of Integral Values 1 % 0 to 100 100
162
PID Offset Adjustment (n133)
Constant n133 adjusts the PID control offset.
If both the target value and the feedback values are zero, adjust n133 so
that the Inverter output frequency is zero.
Primary Delay Time Constant for PID Output (n135)
Constant n135 is the low-pass filter setting for PID control outputs.
There is normally no need to change the setting.
If the viscous friction of the mechanical system is high or if the rigidity
is low, causing the mechanical system to resonate, increase the setting
so that it is higher than the resonance frequency period.
PID Output Gain (n163)
Constant n163 adjusts the PID control output gain.
PID Feedback Gain (n129)
Constant n129 is the gain that adjusts the feedback value.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n133 PID Offset Adjustment 1 % -100 to 100 0
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n135 Primary Delay Time Constant
for PID Output
0.1 s 0.0 to 10.0 0.0
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n163 PID Output Gain 0.1 0.0 to 25.0 1.0
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n129 PID Feedback Gain 0.01 0.00 to 10.00 1.00
6 Programming Features
163
PID Feedback Loss Detection (n136, n137, n138)
PID Upper Limit
Sets the upper limit after PID control as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Prohibition of PID Output
Zero limit occurs when the PID output is negative.
Analog Position Control with Bi-directional PID Output(n145)
If the Bi-directional Function Selection (n145) is set to 1 (enabled), the
following functions will be enabled as bi-directional functions:
• PID Control Selection (n128) ≠ 0 (Enabled) and Bi-directional PID
Prohibit Input from Multi-function Input = OFF (Bi-directional PID
Function Enabled):
If the frequency reference is negative after PID control, the input
rotation direction command will be reversed, and the frequency refer-
ence will be converted to an absolute value. (If Reverse Run Prohibit
(n006) is set to 1, however, reverse operation will not be performed
and the frequency reference will be limited to 0 Hz.)
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n136 Selection for PID
Feedback Loss
Detection
- 0: No detection of PID
feedback loss
1: Detection of PID
feedback loss, oper-
ation continued: FbL
alarm
2: Detection of PID
feedback loss, out-
put turned OFF:
Fault
0
n137 PID Feedback
Loss Detection
Level
1 % 0 to 100
100%/Max. output fre-
quency
0
n138 PID Feedback
Loss Detection
Time
0.1 s 0.0 to 25.5 1.0
164
Bidirectional Reference Control
PID Control Selection (n128) ≠ 0 (Enabled) and Bi-directional PID Pro-
hibit Input from a Multi-function Input = ON (Bi-directional Range
Function Enabled):
If the frequency reference is from 0% to 50% after PID control, the
input rotation direction command will be reversed. If the reference is
from 50% to 100%, operation will be performed without reversing the
input rotation direction command.
The frequency reference at this time is shown in the following diagram.
(The diagram shows operation when a Forward Run Command is
input.) (If Reverse Run Prohibit (n006) is set to 1, however, reverse
operation will not be performed and the frequency reference will be lim-
ited to 0 Hz.)
Bi-directional Function Operation Table
PID Control Selection
(n128)
Bi-directional PID Prohibit Input
(S1 to S7)
OFF ON
K 0
(PID control enabled)
PID output is used
bi-directional
Frequency reference
is used bi-directional
0
(PID control disabled)
Frequency reference
is used bi-directional
Frequency reference
is used bi-directional
0 50 100
Frequency reference
Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
Reverse Forward Frequency (%) after PID control
100%/Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
6 Programming Features
165
• If PID Control Selection (n128) is set to 0 (disabled), or a PID cancel
input using a multi-function input is ON (Bi-directional Range Func-
tion Enabled):
If the input frequency reference is from 0% to 50%, the input rotation
direction command will be reversed. If the reference is from 50% to
100%, operation will be performed without reversing the input rota-
tion direction command.
The frequency reference at this time is shown in the following dia-
gram. (The diagram shows operation when a Forward Run Command
is input.) (If Reverse Run Prohibit (n006) is set to 1, however, reverse
operation will not be performed and the frequency reference will be
limited to 0 Hz.)
PID Analog Output of the PID Feedback Value
If the Monitor Item Selection (n066) is set to 7, the PID feedback value
will be output as an analog value.
0 50 100
Frequency reference
Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
Reverse Forward Frequency (%) after PID control
100%/Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
10 V
0100%
Feedback value (%)
100%/Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
Analog output voltage (V)
166
FREF2 (n025)
FREF3 (n026)
FREF4 (n027)
FREF5 (n028)
FREF6 (n029)
FREF7 (n030)
FREF8 (n031)
FREF9 (n120)
FREF10 (n121)
FREF11 (n122)
FREF12 (n123)
FREF13 (n124)
FREF14 (n125)
FREF15 (n126)
FREF16 (n127)
FJOG (n032)
n164
n004
FREF1 (n024)
n132
n129
n130 1
n131
n132
1
n135
㬍1
㬍-1
n133
n163
n008
Frequency
reference selection
Operator potentiometer
External terminal (0 to 10 V)
External terminal (4 to 20 mA)
External terminal (0 to 20 mA)
Communications
Pulse train
Operator (0 to 10 V)
Operator (4 to 20 mA)
FREF1 (n024)
Operator potentiometer
Remote/Local
Multi-step speed reference
Pulse train
External terminal (0 to 10V)
External terminal (4 to 20mA)
External terminal (0 to 20mA)
Operator (0 to 10 V)
Operator (4 to 20 mA)
Adjustment
gain
PID feedback
value selection
100%
Z−1
+
−
Derivative time (D)
n128=2, 4, 6, 8
+
+
PID control
selection
n128=1, 3, 5, 7
Feedback value
MNTR (U-16)
100%/FMAX
+
−
Proportional
gain
Z−1
+
−
Derivative time (D)
n128=1, 3, 5, 7
PID control selection
n128=2, 4, 6, 8
Integral hold from
multi-function input
Z−1
Integral time (I)
compensation
with reminder
+
+
Integral reset from
multi-function input
−n134
n134
Integral upper limit
Z−1
+
+
+
Note: Z-1 cannot be cleared during run command input. Z-1
can be cleared during stop command input, or during PID
cancel by the multi-function input.
−100%
100%
+
−
Z−1
+
+
PID primary delay time
constant compensation
with reminder
n128 = 5, 6, 7, 8
PID offset adjustment
+
+
PID output gain
PID control
selection
n128=1, 2, 3, 4
−200%
200%
PID output value
MNTR (U-18)
100%/FMAX
PID INPUT
MNTR (U-17)
100%/FMAX
n128=1, 2, 5, 6
PID control
selection
+
+
n128 = 3, 4, 7, 8
0%
110%
100%
0 50% 100%
ON
OFF
0
1
0
1
100%
0 50% 100%
n145
n128=0 or PID cancel by
the multi-function input
n128≠0
Output frequency
(Bi-directional range)
0% to 50%: Reverse of
the input rotation
direction
50% to 100%: Input
rotation direction
(Bi-directional range)
0% to 50%: Reverse of the input
rotation direction
50% to 100%: Input rotation direction
Bi-directional PID prohibit
through multi-function input
Bi-directional Selection
(Bi-directional PID)
If negative data,
reverse of the input
rotation direction.
V7AZ PID Control Block Diagram
6 Programming Features
167
Operator Analog Speed Reference Block Diagram
Digital Operator
0 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
RS-232C MEMOBUS communications
RS-232C MEMOBUS communications
(9600 bps)
(9600 bps)
A/D
conversion
A/D
conversion
VIN
Pin 1
of CN2
IIN
Pin 2
of CN2
GND
Pin 3
of CN2
(JVOP-140)
A/D converter GND
0 V
Inverter
Max. output frequency
ADCH1
ADCH2
Converts A/D (value)
into Hz
n011
3FFH
Max. output frequency
Converts A/D (value)
into Hz
n011
3FFH
1
n070
Primary delay
time constant
Compensation with
reminder
Compensation with
reminder
n069 n011
n011
n068
Gain
n071
Gain
Bias Max. output frequency
0%
110%
Fref
0%
110%
Fref
Max. output frequency
n072
Bias
Z
-1
1
n073
Primary delay
time constant
Z
-1
n068≥0
n068<0
n071≥0
n071<0
Operator Analog Speed Reference Block Diagram
168
Using Constant Copy Function
Constant Copy Function
The V7AZ standard JVOP-140 Digital Operator can store constants for
one Inverter. A backup power supply is not necessary because
EEPROM is used.
The constant copy function is possible only for the Inverters with the
same product series, power supply specifications, and control mode (V/
f control or vector control). However, some constants may not be cop-
ied. It is also impossible to copy constants between V7AZ and VS mini
J7 Inverters.
Prohibiting reading constants from the Inverter can be set in n177. The
constant data cannot be changed when this constant is set.
If an alarm occurs when copying constants, will flash and copy-
ing will continue.
To remove the Digital Operator from the Inverter, turn OFF
the input power supply of the Inverter and confirm that the
display on the Digital Operator has turned OFF. If the Digital
Operator is removed while the power is ON, the Inverter may
be damaged.
Constant Copy Function Selection (n176)
Depending on the setting of n176 (Constant Copy Function Selection),
the following functions can be used.
1. Reading all the constants from the Inverter (READ) and storing
them in EEPROM in the Digital Operator
2. Copying the constants stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter
(COPY)
3. Verifying that the constants in the Digital Operator and the constants
in the Inverter are the same (VERIFY)
4. Displaying the maximum applicable motor capacity and the voltage
class of the Inverter for which constants are stored in the Digital
Operator
5. Displaying the software number of the Inverter for which constants
are stored in the Digital Operator
PRGM
NOTE
6 Programming Features
169
Prohibiting Constant Read Selection (n177)
Select this function to prevent accidentally overwriting the constants
stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator. Reading is not possible
when this constant is set to 0.
The constant data stored in the Digital Operator are safe from accidental
overwriting.
If reading is attempted while this constant is set to 0, PrE will flash.
Press or and return to the constant number display.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n176 Constant
Copy Func-
tion Selection
- rdy: Ready
rEd: Read
CPy: Copy
vFy: Verify
vA: Inverter capacity display
Sno: Software No. display
rdy
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n177 Constant Read
Selection Prohibit
- 0: Read prohibited
1: Read allowed
0
DSPL ENTER
170
READ Function
Reads out the constants in batch from the Inverter and stores them in
EEPROM inside the Digital Operator. When the read-out is executed,
the previously stored constants data in the EEPROM are cleared and
replaced with the newly entered constants.
Example: Storing Constants from Inverter in EEPROM in Operator
Explanation Operator Display
• Enable the set-
ting of con-
stants n001 to
n179.
• Press and
will light.
• Press to dis-
play the set value.
• Change the set value to
4 by pressing the or
key.
• Press .
(May be a different constant number)
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Set Constant
Read Prohibited
Selection
(n177) to read-
enabled. *1
• Change the constant No.
to n177 by pressing the
or key.
• Press to dis-
play the set value.
• Change the set value to
1 by pressing the or
key.
• Press .
(Lit)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
DSPL
PRGM
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
6 Programming Features
171
* 1. When reading is enabled (n177=1), this setting is not necessary.
* 2. This setting is not necessary unless read-prohibition is selected.
• Execute read-
out (READ)
using the Con-
stant Copy
Function Selec-
tion (n176).
• Change the constant
number by pressing the
or key.
• Press to dis-
play the set value.
• Change the set value to
rEd by pressing the or
key.
• Press .
• Press or
.
(Lit)
(Lit)
(Flashes while executing the read.)
↓
(End is displayed after the
read has been completed.)
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Set Constant
Read Prohibited
Selection
(n177) to read-
disabled.*2
• Change the constant
number to n177 by
pressing the or key.
• Press to dis-
play the set value.
• Change the set value to
0 by pressing the or
key.
• Press .
(Lit)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
Explanation Operator Display
ENTER
ENTER
DSPL
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
172
COPY Function
This function writes the constants stored inside the Digital Operator in
batch to the Inverter. Write-in is possible only for Inverters with the
same product series, power supply specifications, and control mode (V/
f control or vector control).
Therefore, writing from 200 V Class to 400 V Class Inverters (or vice
versa), from V/f control mode to vector control mode Inverters (or vice
versa), or from V7AZ to VS mini J7 Inverters is not possible.
The Constant Copy Function Selection (n176), Constant Read Selection
Prohibit (n177), Fault History (n178), Software Version No. (n179), and
hold output frequency are not written. vAE will appear (flashing) if the
capacities of the Inverters differ.
Press to continue writing (the COPY function).
Press to stop the COPY function.
The following constants are not written if the Inverter capacities differ.
Constants added with software version upgrades will not be written
between V7AZ Inverters without the additional constants and V7AZ
Inverters with the additional constants.
For this reason, the settings for the additional constants will not be
changed by the copy operation.
Constant No. Name Constant No. Name
n011 to n017 V/f Settings n108 Motor Leakage Induc-
tance
n036 Motor Rated Current n109 Torque Compensation
Voltage Limiter
n080 Carrier Frequency Se-
lection
n110 Motor No-load Current
n105 Torque Compensation
Iron Loss
n140 Energy-saving Coeffi-
cient K2
n106 Motor Rated Slip n158 Motor Code
n107 Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance
ENTER
STOP/RESET
6 Programming Features
173
Example: Writing Constants from EEPROM in Operator to Inverter
A setting range check and matching check for the written constants are
executed after the constants are written from the Digital Operator to the
Inverter. If a constant error is found, the written constants are discarded
and the constants stored before writing are restored.
When a setting range error is found, the constant number where an error
occurs is indicated by flashing.
When an inconsistency in the settings is found, (: a number)
is indicated by flashing.
Explanation Operator Display
• Enable the set-
tings for con-
stants n001 to
n179.
• Press and
will light.
• Press to dis-
play the set value.
• Change the set value to 4
by pressing the or
key.
• Press .
(May be a different constant number)
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Execute write-
in (COPY)
using the Con-
stant Copy
Function
Selection
(n176).
• Change the constant No.
to n176 by pressing the
or key.
• Press to dis-
play the set value.
• Change the set value to
CPy by pressing the or
key.
• Press .
• Press or
.
(Lit)
(Lit)
(Flashes while executing the
copy.)
↓
(End is displayed after the
copy has been completed.)
(The constant number is displayed.)
DSPL
PRGM
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
DSPL
ENTER
174
VERIFY Function
This function compares the constants stored in the Digital Operator with
the constant in the Inverter. Verification is possible only for the Invert-
ers with same product series, power supply specifications, and control
mode (V/f control or vector control).
When the constants stored in the Digital Operator are the same as those
in the Inverter, vFy will flash, and then End will be displayed.
When the constants are not the same, the unmatched constant number
will be displayed.
Constants added with software version upgrades will be displayed when
VERIFY is performed for V7AZ Inverters without the additional con-
stants and V7AZ Inverters with the additional constants.
6 Programming Features
175
Example: Comparing Constants Stored in EEPROM in Operator with
Constants in Inverter
Explanation Operator Display
• Enable the set-
tings for con-
stants n001 to
n179.
• Press and
will light.
• Press to dis-
play the set value.
• Change the set value to
4 by pressing the or
key.
• Press .
(May be a different constant number)
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Execute VER-
IFY by Constant
Copy Function
Selection (n176).
• Change the constant
number to n176 by
pressing the or
key.
• Press to dis-
play the set value.
(Lit)
• Change the set value to
vFy by pressing the
or key.
(Lit)
• Press .
(Flashes while executing the verifi-
cation.)
• Display the
unmatched
constant number
(Flashes)
(When n011 is different.)
• Display the
constant value in
the Inverter.
• Press . (Flashes)
• Display the con-
stant value in the
Digital Operator.
• Press . (Flashes)
• Continue the
execution of
VERIFY.
• Press the key. (Flashes while executing the
verification.)
↓
(End is displayed when the
verification has been completed.)
• Press or
.
(The constant number is
displayed.)
DSPL
PRGM
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
DSPL
ENTER
176
While a constant number that is not the same is displayed or a constant
value is displayed, press to interrupt the execution of the
verification. End will be displayed. Press or to return
to the constant number display.
Inverter Capacity Display
The voltage class and maximum applicable motor capacity for which
constants are stored in the Digital Operator are displayed.
Example: Displaying Voltage Class and Maximum Applicable Motor
Capacity for Inverter whose Constants are in EEPROM in
Operator
Explanation Operator Display
• Enable the
setting for
constants
n001 to
n179.
• Press and
will light.
• Press to display
the set value.
• Change the set value to 4
by pressing the or
key.
• Press .
(May be a different constant number)
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Execute
Inverter
Capacity
Display
(vA) using
the Con-
stant Copy
Function
Selection
(n176).
• Change the constant num-
ber to n176 by pressing the
or key.
• Press to display
the set value.
(Lit)
• Change the set value to vA
by pressing the or
key.
(Lit)
• Press .
• Press or
.
(Lit) (For 20P7)*
(The constant number is displayed.)
STOP/RESET
DSPL ENTER
DSPL
PRGM
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
DSPL
ENTER
6 Programming Features
177
* The following figure shows the Inverter Capacity Display.
Voltage Class
Single-phase 200 V
Three-phase 200 V
Three-phase 400 V
B
2
4
Max. Applicable Motor Capacity
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.7
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
3.0
0.1 kW
0.25 kW
0.55 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
4.0 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
178
Software No. Display
The software number of the Inverter for which constants are stored in
the Digital Operator is displayed.
Example: Displaying Software No. of Inverter for which Constants are
Stored in EEPROM in Digital Operator
* Displays the lower 4 digits of the software version.
Explanation Operator Display
• Enable the
setting for
constants
n001 to
n179.
• Press and
will light.
• Press to display
the set value.
• Change the set value to 4
by pressing the or key.
• Press .
(May be a different constant number)
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Execute
Software
No. Dis-
play (Sno)*
using the
Constant
Copy Func-
tion Selec-
tion (n176).
• Change the constant num-
ber to n176 by pressing the
or key.
• Press to display
the set value.
(Lit)
• Change the set value to Sno
by pressing the or key.
(Lit)
• Press . (Lit)
(Software version: for example
VSP010013)
• Press or . (The constant number is displayed.)
DSPL
PRGM
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
DSPL ENTER
6 Programming Features
179
Display List
Operator
Display
Description Corrective Action
Lit: Constant copy function selection enabled. -
Lit: READ selected.
Flashes: READ under execution.
-
Lit: Writing (COPY) selected.
Flashes: Writing (COPY) under execution.
-
Lit: VERIFY selected.
Flashes: VERIFY under execution.
-
Lit: Inverter capacity display selected. -
Lit: Software No. display selected. -
Lit: READ, COPY (writing), VERIFY complet-
ed.
-
Flashes: Attempt made to execute READ
while Constant Read Selection Pro-
hibit (n177) is set to 0.
Confirm the necessity to execute READ, then
set Constant Read Selection Prohibit (n177) to
1 to execute READ.
Flashes: The constant could not be read prop-
erly for READ operation. Or, a main
circuit low voltage is detected during
READ operation.
Confirm that the main circuit power supply
voltage is correct, then re-execute READ.
Flashes: A checksum error occurred in the
constant data stored in the Digital
Operator.
The constants stored in the Digital Operator
cannot be used.
Re-execute READ to store the constants in
the Digital Operator.
Flashes: The password for the connected In-
verter and that for the constant data
stored in the Digital Operator dis-
agree.
Example: Writing (COPY) from V7AZ to VS
mini J7
Check if the Inverters are the same product
series.
Flashes: No constant data stored in the Digital
Operator.
Execute READ.
Flashes: Attempt made to execute writing
(COPY) or VERIFY between different
voltage classes or different control
modes.
Check each voltage class and control mode.
Flashes: A main circuit low voltage was de-
tected during writing (COPY) opera-
tion.
Confirm that the main circuit power supply
voltage is correct, then re-execute writing
(COPY).
Lit: A checksum error occurred in the constant
data stored in the Inverter.
Initialize the constants. If an error occurs
again, replace the Inverter due to a failure of
constant memory element (EEPROM) in the
Inverter.
Flashes: Attempt made to execute COPY or
VERIFY between different Inverters
or different capacities.
Press to continue the execution of
COPY or VERIFY. Press to interrupt
the execution of COPY or VERIFY.
ENTER
STOP
180
Note: While rEd, CPy, or vFy is flashing, key input on the Digital Operator is
disabled. While rEd, CPy and vFy are not flashing, pressing or
redisplays the constant number.
Flashes: A communications error occurred be-
tween the Inverter and the Digital Op-
erator.
Check the connection between the Inverter
and Digital Operator.
If a communications error occurs during the
READ operation or writing (COPY) operation,
always re-execute the READ or COPY.
Operator
Display
Description Corrective Action
DSPL
ENTER
6 Programming Features
181
Customer Specific Display Scaling
Constants and Monitor Displays for Which Selection of Unit
Function is Valid
Setting/Displaying Unit Selection for Frequency Reference
(n035)
The frequency reference, output frequency, and the numeric data of fre-
quency reference constants can be displayed in %, rpm, or m/min
according to the set value of constant n035.
Item Contents
Frequency refer-
ence constants
Frequency References 1 to 8 (Constants n024 to n031)
Jog Frequency Reference (Constant n032)
Frequency References 9 to 16 (Constants n120 to n127)
Monitor display Frequency Reference Display (FREF)
Output Frequency Display (FOUT)
Frequency Reference Display (U-01)
Output Frequency Display (U-02)
Constant
No.
Constant Name Description Factory
Setting
n035 Setting/Display-
ing Unit Selec-
tion for
Frequency Ref-
erence
0: Units of 0.01 Hz (less than
100 Hz) 0.1 Hz (100 Hz and
more)
1: Units of 0.1%
2 to 39: Units of rpm (set the
number of motor poles)
40 to 3999: Any unit
0
182
n035 Settings
Setting Description
0 • Setting unit: 0.01 Hz (below 100 Hz), 0.1 Hz (above 100 Hz )
1 • Setting in units of 0.1%: 100.0% at Fmax (n011)
2 to 39 • Setting in units of 1 rpm: (Set number of motor poles in n035)
Display = 120 x frequency value [Hz] / number of motor poles
• Limits: 9999 rpm and rpm x n035 / 120 ≤ 400 Hz
40 to
3999
• Set the display value at 100% of frequency reference (set
value of Fmax (n011)) at the 1st to 4th digits of n035.
The 4th digit of n035, sets the position of decimal point.
The 1st to 3rd digits of n035, sets the display value at 100%
frequency reference (excluding decimal point).
4th digit Position of decimal point
0
1 .
2.
30.
Example: To display 20.0 at 100% of frequency reference, set
n035 to 1200.
• Limits: max. Display value 999 (3 lower digits of n035)
6 Programming Features
183
Note: 1. The frequency reference constants and monitor display data for
which this selection of the unit is valid are stored in the Inverter in
units of Hz.
The units are converted as shown below:
2. The upper limit for each unit is the value with decimal places below
the significant digits truncated.
Example: Where the upper limit for the unit Hz is as follows for
60.00 Hz and n035 = 39:
120 × 60.00 Hz ÷ 39 = 184.6, thus 184 rpm is displayed as the upper
limit.
For displays other than for the upper limit, the decimal places below
the significant digits are rounded off.
3. When verifying constants for the copy function, frequency reference
constants (units of Hz) are used.
Selecting Processing for Frequency Reference
Loss (n064)
Use this setting to select the processing performed if the level of the fre-
quency reference signal from the control circuit terminals suddenly
drops.
* Detected in REMOTE mode (Drive mode) when analog reference (except
potentiometer on Digital Operator) or pulse train reference is selected in the
Frequency Reference Selection (n004).
Processing Method When 1 is Selected
If the level of the frequency reference signal drops by 90 % within 400
ms, operation continues at 80 % of the signal level before the level drop.
n064
Setting
Description
0 Processing for frequency reference loss disabled.
1* Processing for frequency reference loss enabled.
Setting/Display Constant n035 Frequency reference constants
Data for monitor display
Display
Setting
Each unit
system Units of Hz
184
Input/Output Open-phase Detection
* 1. Not detected when set to 0 %.
* 2. Not detected when set to 0.0 s.
The recommended settings for input open-phase detection are
n166=7 % and n167=10 s.
(Open-phase cannot be detected correctly depending on the load status.)
The recommended settings for output open-phase detection are
n168=5 % and n169=0.2 s.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting Range Factory
Setting
n166 Input
Open-phase
Detection Level
1 % 0 to 100 %*1
400.0 V/100 %
(200 V Class)
800.0 V/100 %
(400 V Class)
0 %
n167 Input
Open-phase
Detection Time
1 s 0 to 255 s*2 0 s
n168 Output
Open-phase
Detection Level
1 % 0 to 100 %*1
Inverter’s rated output cur-
rent/100 %
0 %
n169 Output
Open-phase
Detection Time
0.1 s 0.0 to 2.0 s*2 0.0 s
6 Programming Features
185
Undertorque Detection
An alarm signal can be output to a multi-function output terminal (MA,
MB, P1 or P2) when the load on the machine side suddenly becomes
lighter (i.e., when an undertorque occurs).
To output an undertorque detection signal, set the output terminal func-
tion selection in n057, n058, or n059 to 8 (undertorque detected, NO
contact) or 9 (undertorque detected, NC contact).
* Undertorque detection release width (hysteresis) is set at approx. 5 % of the
Inverter’s rated current.
Undertorque Detection Function Selection 1 (n117)
1. To detect undertorques during acceleration, set to 3 or 4.
2. To continue operation after undertorque detection, set to 1 or 3.
During detection, the operation displays the “UL3” alarm (flashing).
3. To halt the Inverter by a fault at undertorque detection, set to 2 or 4.
At detection, the Operation displays the “UL3” fault (continuously
lit).
Setting Description
0 Undertorque detection not provided.
1 Detected during constant-speed running. Operation continues
after detection.
2 Detected during constant-speed running. Operation stops.
3 Detected during running. Operation continues after detection.
4 Detected during running. Operation stops.
n119
n118
n119
ON ON
Multi-function Output
Terminal (Undertorque
Detection Signal)
MA, MB, P1, P2
Time
Motor Current
186
Undertorque Detection Level (n118)
Sets the undertorque detection current level in units of 1 %. (Inverter
rated current=100 %) When detected by torque is selected, motor rated
torque becomes 100 %.
Factory setting=10 %
Undertorque Detection Time (n119)
If the time for which the motor current is less than the undertorque
detection level (n118) is longer than the undertorque detection time
(n119), the undertorque detection function operates.
Factory setting=0.1 s
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function Selection 2
(n097)
When vector control mode is selected, it is possible to select whether
overtorque/undertorque detection is performed by output current or out-
put torque.
When V/f control mode is selected, the n097 setting becomes invalid,
and overtorque/undertorque is detected by output current.
Setting Description
0 Overtorque/undertorque detected by output torque.
1 Overtorque/undertorque detected by output current.
6 Programming Features
187
Using Inverter for Elevating Machines
If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety mea-
sures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from drop-
ping.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
When using the V7AZ for elevating machines such as elevators and
cranes, make sure that the brake holds and observe the following pre-
cautions for safe operation.
Brake ON/OFF Sequence
• For the holding brake’s ON/OFF sequence, use the following Inverter
output signals according to the set control mode.
Do not use “Running (Set value: 1)” for the holding brake’s
ON/OFF interlock signal.
* 1. For Vector control (n002=1), use the same brake ON/OFF sequence with
the same signals as for V/f control.
* 2. Shows the setting when a multi-function photocoupler output terminal
(P1-PC) is used.
* 3. Usually, make the following settings for the frequency detection (n095):
For V/f control: Motor rated slip frequency +1 Hz
For Vector control: 2.5 Hz to 3.0 Hz
If the set value is too low, the motor torque is insufficient and the load
may shift when the brake is applied. Be sure to set n095 to a value larger
than that of the Minimum Output Frequency (n016) and larger than that
of the braker releasing width shown in the following figure. If the set
value is too large, the motor may not run smoothly when it starts running.
Control
Mode
Brake ON/OFF Signals Brake ON/OFF Level
Adjustment
Signal Name Constant*2 Signal Name Constant
V/f
Control*1
(n002=0)
Frequency
detection 1
n058=4 Frequency
detection
level
n095=2.50 Hz
to 4.00 Hz*3
CAUTION
NOTE
188
• Sequence Circuit Configuration and Timing Chart Examples
For the AC sequence cir-
cuit, connect the signal
between P1 and PC to the
sequence circuit with a
relay.
Design the sequence so
that the holding brake con-
tact is open when the
sequence operation condi-
tions are satisfied and the
contact between P1 and PC
is closed (ON).
Make sure that the holding
brake contact is closed
when the emergency stop
signal or Inverter fault
contact output signal is
ON.
• For V/f Control and Vector Control
Output
Frequency
n095
Frequency
Detection
Level 1
Releasing Width -2 Hz
Time
OFF
ON
Up
Down
High/Low
S1
(Forward Run)
S2
(Reverse Run)
S6
(Multi-step Speed Reference 2)
SC
Frequency
Detection1
Inverter V7AZ
Fault Contacts MA
MB
MC
P1
PC
Energizes the brake
when ON.
(30 VDC 1 A or less.)
Holding Brake
Auxiliary Relay Coil
+24V
Sequence
Circuit
BR
OFF
OFF
n026
n024 (Enabled when n004=1)
n095 n095
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OPEN CLOSED
CLOSED
S1-SC UP
S6-SC High Speed/
Low Speed
Output Frequency
0
Frequency
Detection 1
(n058=4)
P1-PC
Holding Brake
Operation
DC Injection Brake
Time
Input
Output
6 Programming Features
189
• For a variable speed operation by an analog signal, set the Frequency
Reference Selection (n004) to a value from 2 to 4.
Stall Prevention during Deceleration
If connecting a braking resistor to discharge regenerative energy, be
sure to set the stall prevention during deceleration (n092) to 1.
If the stall prevention during deceleration (n092) is set to the
factory setting 0 (Enabled), the motor may not stop within the
specified decelerating time.
The Stall Prevention during Acceleration (n093) and the Stall
Prevention Level during Running (n094) should be set to
their factory settings to enable these functions.
Settings for V/f Pattern and Motor Constants
To set the control mode and the V/f pattern, refer to the instruction man-
ual. If the Vector control method is used, also set the motor constants.
Momentary Power Loss Restart and Fault Restart
Do not use the momentary power loss restart and fault restart functions
in applications for elevating machines. Make sure that n081=0 and
n082=0. If these functions are used, the motor coasts to a stop with the
brake contact open when a momentary power loss or fault occurs during
operation, possibly resulting in serious accidents.
I/O Open-phase Protection and Overtorque Detection
The I/O open-phase protection is only available for 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW
models.
To prevent the machine from falling when the motor is open-phase or in
a similar situation, enable the I/O open-phase protection (n166 to n169)
and the overtorque detection (n096 to n099). At the factory, these con-
stants are set so that these functions are disabled.
Also, take safety measures such as protection against falls on the
machine.
Carrier Frequency
Set the carrier frequency selection (n080) to 5 kHz or more (n080: 2 to 4
or 12) to secure the motor torque even if an overcurrent occurs (the cur-
rent is limited).
NOTE
190
External Baseblock Signal
If the External Baseblock Command (settings 12 and 13 of n050 to
n056) is input while the motor is running, the motor will immediately
coast to a stop. Do not input the External Baseblock Command while
the motor is running unless necessary.
If using the External Baseblock Command for an emergency stop or to
start run of an interlock, make sure that the holding brake operates.
If the External Baseblock Command is input and immediately reset, the
Inverter does not output voltage during the minimum baseblock time,
which is 0.5 to 0.7 seconds depending on the Inverter capacity. Do not
use the External Baseblock Command in an application where the motor
is frequently stopped and started.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
If the delay time for the holding brake’s mechanical operation is not
taken into consideration and the acceleration/deceleration time on the
Inverter side is set to a time that is too short, an overcurrent or wear on
the brakes may occur at starting or the load will shift at stopping
because the holding brake does not operate on time. If so, use the S-
curve characteristic function or lengthen the acceleration/deceleration
time to tune the timing for the holding brake.
Contactor on the Inverter’s Output-side
Do not install a contactor between the Inverter and the motor.
If a contactor must be installed because of local electrical codes or regu-
lations or to operate motors with an Inverter, excluding emergencies,
open or close the contactor only where the holding brake is fully closed
and the Inverter is in baseblock status with the baseblock signal ON.
If the contactor is opened or closed while the Inverter is controlling the
motor or DC injection braking, surge voltage or a current from the
motor by full-voltage starting may cause an Inverter fault.
When a contactor is installed between the Inverter and the motor, enable
the I/O open-phase protection (n166 to n169).
For more information on using Inverters exclusively for elevators or cranes,
contact your OMRON representatives or the nearest OMRON sales office.
6 Programming Features
191
Using MECHATROLINK-II Communications
MECHATROLINK-II can be used with the SI-T/V7 option unit.
For details, refer to V7AZ OPTION UNIT MECHATROLINK COMMU-
NICATIONS INTERFACE UNIT INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC73060003).
The following constants are used for communications error settings for
SI-T/V7.
Constant
No.
Name Unit Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n063 Watchdog Error Operation
Selection (For SI-T/V7)
- 0 to 4 0
n114 Number of Transmission
Cycle Error Detection
(For SI-T/V7)
-2 to 10 2
n063
Setting
Description
0 Coast to a stop
1 Deceleration to a stop using Deceleration Time 1 in
n020.
2 Deceleration to a stop using Deceleration Time 2 in
n022.
3 Continuous operation (Alarm)
4 Continuous operation (Alarm, no fault)
192
7 Maintenance and Inspection
• Never touch high-voltage terminals on the Inverter.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electrical shock.
• Disconnect all power before performing mainte-
nance or inspection, and then wait at least one
minute after the power supply is disconnected. Con-
firm that all indicators are OFF before proceeding.
If the indicators are not OFF, the capacitors are still
charged and can be dangerous.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part
of the V7AZ.
The Inverter is an electronic device that uses semi-
conductors, and is thus vulnerable to high voltage.
• Only authorized personnel should be permitted to
perform maintenance, inspection, or parts replace-
ment.
(Remove all metal objects (watches, bracelets, etc.)
before starting work.)
(Use tools which are insulated against electrical
shock.)
Failure to observe these warnings may result in an
electric shock.
• The control PCB employs CMOS ICs.
Do not touch the CMOS elements.
They are easily damaged by static electricity.
• Do not connect or disconnect wires, connectors, or
the cooling fan while power is applied to the circuit.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
WARNING
CAUTION
7 Maintenance and Inspection
193
Periodic Inspection
Periodically inspect the Inverter as described in the following table to
prevent accidents and to ensure high performance with high reliability.
Location to
Check
Check for Solution
Terminals, In-
verter mounting
screws, etc.
Improper seating or
loose connections in
hardware.
Properly seat and tighten
hardware.
Heatsinks Buildup of dust, dirt, and
debris
Blow with dry compressed air
at a pressure of 39.2 × 104 to
58.8 × 104 Pa (4 to 6 kg/cm2).
Printed circuit
boards
Accumulation of conduc-
tive material or oil mist
Blow with dry compressed air
at a pressure of 39.2 × 104 to
58.8 × 104 Pa (4 to 6 kg/cm2).
If dust or oil cannot be re-
moved, replace the Inverter.
Power elements
and smoothing
capacitor
Abnormal odor or discol-
oration
Replace the Inverter.
Cooling fan Abnormal noise or vibra-
tion
Cumulative operation
time exceeding 20,000
hours
Replace the cooling fan.
194
Part Replacement
Inverter’s maintenance periods are given below. Keep them as guide-
lines.
Part Replacement Guidelines
Note: Usage conditions are as follows:
• Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 30°C
• Load factor: 80% max.
• Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
Part Standard
Replacement
Period
Replacement Method
Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new part.
Smoothing capacitor 5 years Replace the Inverter unit with a new
one.(Determine need by inspection.)
Breaker relays - Replace the Inverter unit with a new
one.(Determine need by inspection.)
Fuses 10 years Replace the Inverter unit with a new
one.(Determine need by inspection.)
Aluminum capaci-
tors on PCBs
5 years Replace the Inverter unit with a new
one.(Determine need by inspection.)
7 Maintenance and Inspection
195
Replacement of Cooling Fan
Inverters of
200 V class, single-phase, 0.1 to 0.55, 2.2 and 4.0 kW,
200 V class, three-phase, 0.1 to 1.1 and 4.0 to 5.5 kW,
400 V class, three-phase, 3.0 to 7.5 kW:
1. Removal
1. Press the right and left catches
on the fan cover in direction 1,
and then pull them in direction
2 to remove the fan cover from
the Inverter.
2. Pull the wiring in direction 3
from the fan cover rear face,
and remove the protective tube
and connector.
3. Open the left and right sides of
the fan cover to remove the
cooling fan from the cover.
2. Mounting
1. Mount the cooling fan on the
fan cover. The arrow mark to
indicate the airflow direction
of the cooling fan must be on
the opposite side to the cover.
2. Connect the connector and
mount the protective tube
firmly. Mount the connector
joint section on the fan cover
rear face.
3. Mount the fan cover on the
Inverter. Always mount the
right and left catches on the
fan cover on the heatsinks.
Airflow Direction
3
196
Inverters of
200 V class single-phase, 1.5 and 2.2 kW,
200 V class three-phase, 1.1 and 1.5 kW,
400 V class three-phase, 0.37 to 2.2 kW:
1. Removal
1. Remove the front cover and
terminal cover, and then
remove the cooling fan con-
nector (CN10).
2. Press the right and left catches
on the fan cover in direction 1,
and pull the fan cover in direc-
tion 2 to remove it from the
Inverter. Pull out the wiring
from the cable lead-in hole at
the bottom of the plastic case.
3. Open the right and left sides of
the fan cover to remove the
cover from the cooling fan.
2. Mounting
1. Mount the cooling fan on the
fan cover. The arrow mark to
indicate the airflow direction
must be opposite to the cover.
2. Mount the fan cover on the
Inverter. Always mount the
right and left catches on the
fan cover on the heatsinks.
Thread in the wiring from the
cable lead-in hole at the bot-
tom of the plastic case to the
inside of the Inverter.
3. Connect the wiring to the
cooling fan connector (CN10)
and mount the front cover and
the terminal cover.
2
1
1
Cooling
Fan Wire
Airflow Direction
8 Fault Diagnosis
197
8 Fault Diagnosis
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm and fault displays, the fault conditions,
and the corrective actions to be taken if the V7AZ
malfunctions.
Inverter alarms are classified into alarm display and fault display.
Alarm display:When a minor fault occurs in the Inverter, the Digital
Operator flashes the display. In this case, the operation
is continued, and restored automatically as soon as the
cause is removed. Multi-function output can output the
minor fault status to external devices.
Fault display: When a major fault occurs in the Inverter, the protective
function operates, and the Digital Operator lights the dis-
play and shuts off the output to stop the Inverter. The
fault can be output as a fault output to the external
devices by multi-function output.
To reset the fault, turn ON the reset signal with the Run Command OFF
or cycle the power after taking the corrective action.
* Selecting "always ON" mode at fan operation selection, the power
must be cycled to release the alarm display.
Corrective Actions of Models with Blank Cover
1. Input fault reset or cycle the power supply OFF and ON.
2. When a fault cannot be corrected:
(1) Turn the power supply OFF and check the wiring and external circuit
(sequence).
(2) Turn the power supply OFF and replace the blank cover with the Dig-
ital Operator to display faults. The faults are displayed after turning
the power ON.
198
Corrective Actions of Models with Digital Operator
Alarm Display
Alarm Displays and Meaning
Alarm Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and
Corrective Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Flashing
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact out-
put is not ac-
tivated.
UV (Main circuit low volt-
age)
Main circuit DC voltage
dropped below the low-volt-
age detection level while the
Inverter output is OFF.
200 V: Main circuit DC volt-
age drops below ap-
prox. 200 V (160 V for
single-phase).
400 V: Main circuit DC volt-
age dropped below
approx. 400 V.
(Control supply fault) Control
power supply fault is detected
while the Inverter output is
OFF.
Check the following:
• Power supply voltage
• Main circuit power supply
connections
• Terminal screws: Loose?
• Monitor value
Confirm voltage (DC volt-
age) between terminals
"+1" and "-".
⇓
If there is no problem, the In-
verter may be faulty.
Flashing
OV (Main circuit over-
voltage)
Main circuit DC voltage ex-
ceeded the overvoltage de-
tection level while the Inverter
output is OFF.
Detection level:
200 V: approx. 410 V or more
400 V: approx. 820 V or more
Check the following:
• Power supply voltage
• Monitor value
Confirm voltage (DC volt-
age) between terminals
"+1" and "-".
⇓
If there is no problem, the In-
verter may be faulty.
Flashing
OH (Heatsink overheat)
Intake air temperature in-
creased while the Inverter
output is OFF.
Check the following:
• Intake air temperature.
• There is no thermal
source around the
Inverter and oil stuck to
the fan has not lowered
the cooling capability.
• Fan is not clogged.
• No foreign matters, such
as water, is inside the
Inverter.
Flashing
CAL (MEMOBUS com-
munications waiting)
Correct data has not been re-
ceived from the PLC when
the constants n003 (Run
Command Selection) is 2 or
n004 (Frequency Reference
Selection) is 6, and power is
turned ON.
Check the following:
• Communications devices
and transmission signals.
• PLC is not faulty.
• Transmission cable is
connected properly.
• Wiring is made properly.
• Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
: ON : Flashing : OFF
8 Fault Diagnosis
199
Flashing
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact out-
put is not ac-
tivated.
OH8 (Motor Overheat-
ing)
The motor temperature PTC
thermistor input exceeded the
alarm detection level.
• Check the size of the load
and the length of the
acceleration, decelera-
tion, and cycle times.
• Check the V/f characteris-
tics.
• Check the input motor
temperature.
(Flash-
ing)
OP (Constant setting
error when constants
are set through MEMO-
BUS communications)
OP1: Two or more values
are set for multi-func-
tion input selection.
(constants n050 to
n056)
OP2: Relationship among V/f
constants is not cor-
rect. (constants n011,
n013, n014, n016)
OP3: Setting value of motor
rated current exceeds
150% of Inverter Rated
Current. (constant
n036)
OP4: Upper/lower limit of fre-
quency reference is re-
versed. (constants
n033, n034)
OP5: Relationship among
jump frequency 1, 2
and 3 is not correct.
(constants n083 to
n085)
OP6: Multi-function Analog
Inputs (n077) and PID
Control Selection
(n128) are both set to a
value other than 0.
OP9: The setting of the In-
verter capacity does
not coincide with the
Inverter. (Contact your
OMRON representa-
tive.)
Check the setting values.
Alarm Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and
Corrective Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
200
Flashing
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact out-
put is not
activated.
OL3 (Overtorque detec-
tion)
Motor current exceeded the
preset value in constant
n098.
Overtorque detection level
was exceeded because of in-
creased leak current due to
excessively long wiring.
• Reduce the load, and
increase the accelera-
tion/deceleration time.
• Refer to the paragraph
of Carrier Frequency
Selection (n080)14kHz
max on page 94.
• Check the wiring
(increase of current
caused by rare shortcir-
cuit, etc.).
Flashing
SER (Sequence error)
Inverter received Local/Re-
mote Command or communi-
cations/control circuit terminal
changing signals from the
multi-function terminal while
the Inverter output is ON.
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
Flashing
UL3 (Undertorque de-
tection)
When V/f mode is selected:
The Inverter’s output current
was less than the under-
torque detection level (n118).
When vector mode is select-
ed: The output current or out-
put torque was less than the
detection level (n097 or
n118).
Operation when undertorque
is detected will be determined
by the setting in n117.
• Check the setting in
n118.
• Check the operating con-
ditions, and remove the
cause.
Alarm Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and
Corrective Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
8 Fault Diagnosis
201
Flashing
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact out-
put is not
activated.
BB (External Baseblock)
Baseblock Command at
multi-function terminal is ON
and the Inverter output is
OFF (motor coasting). Condi-
tion is cleared when input
command is removed.
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
Flashing
EF (Simultaneous FWD/
REV Run Commands)
When FWD and REV Run
Commands are simulta-
neously input for over 500
ms, the Inverter stops accord-
ing to constant n005.
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
Flashing
STP (Operator function
stop)
was pressed during
running via a control circuit
terminal FWD/REV Run
Command, or by a Run Com-
mand from communications.
The Inverter stops according
to constant n005.
STP (Emergency stop)
Inverter received emergency
stop alarm signal. Inverter
stops according to constant
n005.
• Turn OFF FWD/REV Run
Command of control cir-
cuit terminals.
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
Flashing
FAN (Cooling fan fault)
Cooling fan is locked.
Check the following:
• Cooling fan
• Cooling fan connection
• Foreign matter is not
interrupting rotation.
• Fan is mounted correctly.
• Relay connector is con-
nected properly after
replacement of the fan.
Alarm Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and
Corrective Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
or
202
Flashing
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact out-
put is not ac-
tivated.
CE (MEMOBUS) com-
munications fault
Check the following:
• Communication devices
or communication sig-
nals.
• PLC is not faulty.
• Transmission cable is
connected properly.
• Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
• Wiring is made properly.
Flashing
FBL (PID feedback loss
detection)
PID feedback value dropped
below the detection level
(n137). When PID feedback
loss is detected, the Inverter
operates according to the
n136 setting.
Check the mechanical sys-
tem and correct the cause, or
increase the value of n137.
Flashing
Option card communica-
tions fault.
• Communication fault has
occurred in a mode
where the communica-
tions option card was
used and a Run Com-
mand or frequency refer-
ence was input from the
PLC.
• Communication fault has
occurred in a mode
where a Run Command
and frequency reference
are set from the commu-
nication option card.
Check the following:
• Communications devices
or communications sig-
nals.
• PLC is not faulty.
• Transmission cable is
connected properly.
• Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
• Wiring is made properly.
• Communication option
card is inserted correctly.
Flashing
OH3 (Inverter overheat
alarm)
The Inverter overheat alarm
(OH3) was input from a multi-
function input terminal (S1
and S7).
• Clear the multi-function
input terminal’s Inverter
overheat alert input.
• Check that the wiring is
made properly.
• Check that a signal is not
input from the PLC.
Alarm Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and
Corrective Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
or
8 Fault Diagnosis
203
Fault Display
Fault Displays and Meanings
Fault Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and Corrective
Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OC (Overcurrent)
Inverter output current mo-
mentarily exceeded approx.
250% of rated current.
Operation is restored, if no
fault is found, after confirming
the following:
• Short circuit or grounding
at Inverter output side
• Excessive load GD2
• Extremely rapid
Acceleration/Deceleration
Time (constants n019 to
n022)
• Special motor used
• Starting motor during
coasting
• Motor of a capacity
greater than the Inverter
rating has been started.
• Magnetic contactor
opened/closed at the
Inverter output side
• Leak current increased
because of excessively
long wiring
Note: Before turning the pow-
er ON again, make sure that
no short-circuit or ground fault
occurs at the Inverter output.
GF (Grounding) *1 *2
Grounding current exceeded
approx. 50%
of Inverter rated output cur-
rent at the Inverter output
side.
Inverter output grounded.
⇓
Check the cause, and re-
store the operation.
Note: Before turning the
power ON again, make sure
that no short-circuit or
ground fault occurs at the In-
verter output.
SC (Load shortcircuit) *1
Inverter output or load short-
circuited.
Inverter output shortcircuit-
ed or grounded.
⇓
Check the cause, and re-
store the operation.
* 1. Indicates that an Inverter of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Classes) is attached.
* 2. The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running. A ground fault
may not be detected in the following cases.
• A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
• A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
204
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OV (Main circuit over-
voltage)
Main circuit DC voltage level
exceeded the overvoltage de-
tection level while the Inverter
was running.
Detection level (DC voltage:
Voltage between terminals
"+1" and "-")
200 V: Approx. 410 V or more
400 V: Approx. 820 V or more
1. Regenerative energy is
large.
• The setting of decelera-
tion time is too short.
• Negative load (e.g., ele-
vator) is excessive at
lowering.
• Confirm that the load
does not have any prob-
lem.
2. Input voltage is errone-
ous.
Confirm that DC voltage
exceeding the left value
is not input.
UV1 (Main circuit low
voltage)
Main circuit DC voltage
dropped below the low-volt-
age detection level while the
Inverter output is ON.
200 V: Stops at main circuit
DC voltage below ap-
prox. 200 V (160 V for
single-phase)
400 V: Stops at main circuit
DC voltage below ap-
prox. 400 V.
Check the following:
• Power supply voltage
• Main circuit power supply
connections
• Terminal screws: Loose?
• Monitor value
Confirm voltage (DC volt-
age) between terminals
"+1" and "-".
⇓
If there is no problem, the In-
verter may be faulty.
UV2 (Control power sup-
ply fault)
Inverter detected voltage fault
of control power supply dur-
ing running.
Replace the Inverter.
Fault Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and Corrective
Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
8 Fault Diagnosis
205
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OH (Heatsink overheat)
Temperature increased be-
cause of Inverter overload op-
eration or intake air
temperature rise.
• Excessive load
• Improper V/f pattern set-
ting
• Insufficient acceleration
time if the fault occurs
during acceleration
• Intake air temperature
exceeding 50°C (122°F)
• Cooling fan stops.
• Cooling fan has lowered
cooling capability or
stops.
• Heatsink is clogged.
• There is a thermal source
around the Inverter
⇓
Check the following:
• Load size
• V/f pattern setting (con-
stants n011 to n017)
• Intake air temperature.
• Cooling fan is turning
while the Inverter is run-
ning.
• Foreign matter on the fan
is not interrupting rota-
tion.
• Fan is mounted properly.
• There is no thermal
source around the
Inverter.
OH9 (Motor overheat-
ing)
• Check the size of the load
and the length of the
acceleration, decelera-
tion, and cycle times.
• Check the V/f characteris-
tics.
• Check the input motor
temperature.
RH (Externally-mount-
ing-type braking resistor
overheat) *
Protection of externally
mounting-type
braking resistor operated.
• Insufficient deceleration
time
• Excessive motor regener-
ative energy
⇓
• Increase deceleration
time
• Reduce regenerative load
* Indicates that an Inverter of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Classes) is attached.
Fault Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and Corrective
Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
206
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OL1 (Motor overload)
Motor overload protection op-
erated by built-in electronic
thermal overload relay.
• Check the load size or V/f
pattern setting (constants
n011 to n017).
• Set the motor rated cur-
rent shown on the name-
plate in constant n036.
• Check that the settings of
motor protection (whether
motor cooling method is
self-cooled or fan-cooled)
and motor protection time
constant are made cor-
rectly.
• Check the load size, V/f
set value, operation pat-
tern, etc. to confirm that
the load is not excessive
under actual operation.
• Recheck the item of
motor protection and set
the constants again if
necessary.
• Refer to Carrier Fre-
quency Selection
(n080)14kHz max on
page 94.
• Check the wiring
(increase of current
caused by rare shortcir-
cuit, etc.).
OL2 (Inverter overload)
Inverter overload protection
operated by built-in electron-
ic thermal overload relay.
• Check the load size or V/f
pattern setting (constants
n011 to n017).
• Check the Inverter capac-
ity.
• Check the load size, V/f
set value, operation pat-
tern, etc. to confirm that
the load is not excessive
under actual operation.
• Refer to Carrier Fre-
quency Selection
(n080)14kHz max on
page 94.
• Check the wiring
(increase of current
caused by rare shortcir-
cuit, etc.).
Fault Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and Corrective
Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
8 Fault Diagnosis
207
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OL3 (Overtorque detec-
tion)
V/f mode: Inverter output cur-
rent exceeded the preset val-
ue in constant n098.
Vector mode: Motor output
current or torque exceeded
the preset value in constants
n097 and n098.
When overtorque is detect-
ed, Inverter performs opera-
tion according to the preset
setting of constant n096.
• Check the driven
machine and correct the
cause of the fault, or
increase the value of
constant n098 up to the
highest value allowed for
the machine.
• Check the load size, V/f
set value, operation pat-
tern, etc. to confirm that
the load is not excessive
under actual operation.
• Refer to Carrier Fre-
quency Selection
(n080)14kHz max on
page 94.
• Check the wiring
(increase of current
caused by rare shortcir-
cuit, etc.).
PF (Main circuit voltage
fault)
The main circuit’s DC voltage
oscillated in an irregular way
when not in regenerative op-
eration.
• Open phase of input
supply
• Momentary power loss
• Excessive fluctuation in
input supply voltage
• Unbalanced line voltage
⇓
Check the following:
• Main circuit power sup-
ply connections
• Power supply voltage
• Terminal screws:
Loose?
LF (Output open phase)
An open phase occurred in
Inverter output.
• Disconnection in output
cable
• Disconnection in motor
windings
• Loose output terminal
screws ⇓
Check the following:
• Disconnection in output
wiring
• Motor impedance
• Terminal screws:
Loose?
Fault Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and Corrective
Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
208
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
UL3 (Undertorque de-
tection)
When V/f mode is selected:
The Inverter’s output current
was less than the Under-
torque Detection Level
(n118).
When vector mode is select-
ed:
The output current or output
torque was less than the de-
tection level (n097 to n118).
Operation when undertorque
is detected will be determined
by the setting in n117.
• Check the setting in
n118.
• Check the operating
conditions, and remove
the cause.
EF (External fault)
Inverter receives an external
fault input from control circuit
terminal.
EF0: External fault reference
through MEMOBUS
communications
EF1: External Fault Input
Command from con-
trol circuit terminal S1
EF2: External Fault Input
Command from con-
trol circuit terminal S2
EF3: External Fault Input
Command from con-
trol circuit terminal S3
EF4: External Fault Input
Command from con-
trol circuit terminal S4
EF5: External Fault Input
Command from con-
trol circuit terminal S5 *
EF6: External Fault Input
Command from con-
trol circuit terminal S6 *
EF7: External Fault Input
Command from con-
trol circuit terminal S7
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
CPF-00
Inverter cannot communicate
with the Digital Operator for 5
s or more when power is
turned ON.
Cycle power after confirming
that the Digital Operator is se-
curely mounted. If the fault re-
mains, replace the Digital
Operator or Inverter.
CPF-01
Transmission fault occurred
for 5 s or more when trans-
mission starts with the Digital
Operator.
Cycle power after confirming
that the Digital Operator is se-
curely mounted. If the fault re-
mains, replace the Digital
Operator or Inverter.
CPF-04
EEPROM fault of Inverter
control circuit was detected.
• Record all constant data
and initialize the con-
stants. (Refer to page
53.)
• Cycle power. If the fault
remains, replace the
Inverter.
Fault Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and Corrective
Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
8 Fault Diagnosis
209
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
CPF-05
AD converter fault was de-
tected.
Cycle power.
If the fault remains, replace
the Inverter.
CPF-06
• Option card connection
fault
• A non-corresponding
option card is connected.
• Cycle power to the
Inverter after checking
the connection of the
Communication option
card.
• Verify Software Version
No. (n179).
• Check the applicable
Inverter software number
that is listed in the
instruction manual of the
Communications Option
Card.
CPF-07
Operator control circuit (EE-
PROM or AD converter) fault
Cycle power after checking
that the Digital Operator is
securely mounted. If the fault
remains, replace the Digital
Operator or Inverter.
CPF-11
Combination error
Control circuit is not com-
bined with correct software.
(Contact your OMRON rep-
resentative.)
Communication option
card self-diagnostic er-
ror
• Option card fault.
• Replace the option card.
• Confirm that no foreign
matter is on the Commu-
nications Option Card.
Communication option
card model code error
Communication option
card DPRAM error
OPR (Operator con-
necting fault)
Cycle power. If the fault re-
mains, replace the Inverter.
CE (MEMOBUS com-
munications fault)
Check the following:
• Communications
devices or communica-
tions signals.
• PLC is not faulty.
• Transmission cable is
connected properly.
• Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
• Wiring is made properly.
Fault Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and Corrective
Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
210
* To display or clear the fault history, refer to page 49.
Stops ac-
cording to
constant.
STP (Emergency stop)
The Inverter stopped accord-
ing to constant n005 after re-
ceiving the emergency stop
fault signal.
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selec-
tion (constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
FBL (PID feedback loss
detection)
PID feedback value dropped
below the detection level.
When PID feedback loss is
detected, the Inverter oper-
ates according to the n136
setting.
Check the mechanical sys-
tem and correct the cause,
or increase the value of
n137.
Option card communi-
cations fault
A communication error oc-
curred in the mode where
the communication option
card was used and a Run
Command or frequency ref-
erence was input from the
PLC.
Check the following:
• Communications
devices or communica-
tions signals.
• PLC is not faulty.
• Transmission cable is
connected properly.
• Wiring is made properly.
• Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
• Communication option
card is not inserted cor-
rectly.
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
• Insufficient power
supply voltage
• Control power sup-
ply fault
• Hardware fault
Check the following:
• Power supply voltage
• Main circuit power sup-
ply connections
• Terminal screws: Loose?
• Control sequence.
• Replace the Inverter.
Fault Display Inverter
Status
Description Causes and Corrective
Actions
Digital
Operator
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
or
(OFF)
8 Fault Diagnosis
211
Errors Occurring during Autotuning
Indication Meaning Cause Corrective Action
E02 Alarm An alarm (XXX) was detected dur-
ing tuning.
• Check input data.
• Check wiring and the machine
environment.
• Check the load.
E03 STOP key input The STOP key was pressed dur-
ing tuning and tuning was can-
celled.
−
E04 Resistance
error
• Tuning was not completed in
the specified time.
• Tuning results were outside
the setting range for constants.
• Check input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• Disconnect the motor from the
machine system if connected
during rotational autotuning.
• Change the Maximum Voltage
if the Maximum Voltage is
higher than the Inverter input
power supply voltage.
E05 No-load current
error
E09 Acceleration
error
The motor did not accelerate in the
specified time.
• Increase Acceleration Time 1
(n019).
• If Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration (n093) has been
lowered, return it to the initial
value.
• Disconnect the motor from the
machine system, if connected.
E12 Current
detection error
• Current flow exceeded motor
rated current.
• The sign of the detected cur-
rent was reversed.
• At least one of phases U, V,
and W is open.
Check the current detection circuit,
motor wiring, and current detector
installation.
212
Troubleshooting
Trouble Cause Corrective Actions
The motor does not
operate when an
external operation
signal is input.
The operation method selection
is wrong.
The RUN command (n003) is not set
to Control Circuit Terminal.
Set the RUN command (n003) to
Control Circuit Terminal.
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The Multi-function Input Selection
(n052) is set to 3-wire sequence, and
the S2 control terminal is not closed.
To use a 3-wire sequence, make the
wiring so that the S2 control terminal
is closed. To use a 2-wire sequence,
set the Multi-function Input (n052) to a
value other than 3-wire sequence.
The frequency reference is too
low.
The input frequency reference is lower
than the setting for the Min.Output
Frequency (n016).
Input a frequency reference greater
than the Min. Output Frequency
(n016).
Local mode is in effect. Set the LO/RE selection of the Digital
Operator to RE.
The V-I SW (SW2) setting is
wrong.
Example: The reference 4 to 20 mA is
input, but SW2 is set to “V.”
For analog input, make sure that the
Frequency Reference (n004) and SW2
settings are correct.
The setting of NPN/PNP switch
(SW1) is not correct.
Set SW1 correctly.
Program mode is enabled. Press to make flash
and change to Drive mode.
The motor stops. The
torque is not output. The stall prevention level during
a c c e l e r a t i o n i s t o o l o w .
Because the Stall Prevention Level
during Acceleration (n093) is set too
low, the output current reaches the set
level, the output frequency is stopped,
and the acceleration time is
lengthened.
Check if the Stall Prevention Level
during Acceleration (n093) is set to an
appropriate value.
The stall prevention level during
running is too low.
Because the Stall Prevention Level
during Running (n094) is set too low,
the output current reaches the set
level, and the speed drops.
Check if the Stall Prevention Level
during Running (n094) is set to an
appropriate value.
The load is too heavy.
If the load is too heavy, stall
prevention is activated, the output
frequency is stopped, and the
acceleration time is lengthened.
• Lengthen the set acceleration time
(n019).
• Reduce the load.
When the maximum frequency
(n011) was changed, the maxi-
mum voltage frequency (n013)
was also changed.
To increase the speed of a general-
purpose motor, only change the
maximum frequency (n011).
The V/f set value is too low. Set the V/f (n011 to n017) according to
the load characteristics.
DSPL
FREF
8 Fault Diagnosis
213
The motor speed is
unstable. The motor
speed fluctuates when
operating with a light
load.
The stall prevention level during
running is too low.
Because the Stall Prevention Level
during Running (n094) is too low, the
output current reaches the set level
and the speed drops.
Check if the Stall Prevention Level
during Running (n094) is set to an
appropriate value.
The load is too heavy.
If the load is too heavy, stall
prevention is activated, the output
frequency is stopped, and the
acceleration time is lengthened.
Reduce the load.
The carrier frequency is too
high.
If operating the motor with a light load,
a high carrier frequency may cause
the motor speed to fluctuate.
Decrease the carrier frequency (n080).
The V/f set value is too high for
a low-speed operation.
Because the set value for the V/f is too
high, over-excitation occurs at low
speeds.
Set the V/f (n011 to n017) according to
the load characteristics.
The maximum frequency (n011)
and maximum voltage frequen-
cy (n013) were incorrectly ad-
justed.
Example: To operate a 60-Hz motor at
40 Hz or less, the maximum frequency
and base frequency are set to 40 Hz.
Set the maximum frequency (n011)
and the maximum voltage frequency
(n013) according to the motor
specifications.
The Inverter is used for an
operation at 1.5 Hz or less.
Do not use the V7 Inverter for an
operation that runs at 1.5 Hz or less.
For an operation at 1.5 Hz or less, use
a different Inverter model.
The analog reference input is
unstable and has noise
interference.
Increase the set value for the filter time
constant (n062).
The LED of the Digital
Operator is unlit. The power is not being
supplied.
The breaker or other component on
the power input side is not turned ON,
and the power is not being supplied.
Check if the power is being supplied.
Because the Digital Operator is not
correctly mounted, the display does
not appear.
Mount the Digital Operator correctly.
Short-circuit bar for terminals +1
and +2 is not connected.
Confirm that the short-circuit bar is
connected properly.
POWER charge indicator lamp
lights but the Digital Operator
does not give any display after
the power supply is turned ON.
Since the main circuit fuse is blown,
replace the Inverter.
Trouble Cause Corrective Actions
214
9 Specifications
Standard Specifications (200 V Class)
Voltage Class 200 V single-/3-phase
Model
CIMR-
V7AZ
3-phase 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 24P0 25P5 27P5
Single-phase B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B4P0 - -
Max. Applicable Motor Output
kW*1
0.1 0.25 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5
Inverter Capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7 9.5 13
Rated Output Current
(A)
0.8 1.6 3 5 8 11 17.5 25 33
Max. Output Voltage
(V)
3-phase, 200 to 230 V (proportional to input voltage)
Single-phase, 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage)
Max. Output Fre-
quency (Hz)
400 Hz (Programmable)
Rated Input Voltage
and Frequency
3-phase, 200 to 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Single-phase, 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Allowable Voltage
Fluctuation
−15% to +10%
Allowable Frequency
Fluctuation
±5%
Output CharacteristicsPower Supply
9 Specifications
215
Control Method Sine wave PWM (V/f control/vector control selectable)
Frequency Control
Range
0.1 to 400 Hz
Frequency Accuracy
(Temperature Change)
Digital reference: ±0.01% (−10 to 50°C)
Analog reference: ±0.5% (25 ±10°C)
Frequency Setting
Resolution
Digital reference:
0.01 Hz (less than 100 Hz)/0.1 Hz (100 Hz or more)
Analog reference: 1/1000 of max. output frequency
Output Frequency
Resolution
0.01 Hz
Overload Capacity 150% rated output current for one minute
Frequency Reference
Signal
0 to 10 VDC (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) pulse train
input, frequency setting potentiometer (Selectable)
Acceleration/
Deceleration Time
0.00 to 6000 s
(Acceleration/deceleration time are independently programmed.)
Braking Torque Short-term average deceleration torque*2
0.1, 0.25 kW (0.13 HP, 0.25 HP): 150% or more
0.55, 1.1 kW (0.5 HP, 1 HP): 100% or more
1.5 kW (2 HP): 50% or more
2.2 kW (3 HP) or more: 20% or more
Continuous regenerative torque: Approx. 20% (150% with optional brak-
ing resistor, braking transistor built-in)
V/f Characteristics Possible to program any V/f pattern
Voltage Class 200 V single-/3-phase
Model
CIMR-
V7AZ
3-phase 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 24P0 25P5 27P5
Single-phase B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B4P0 - -
Control Characteristics
216
Motor Overload
Protection
Electronic thermal overload relay
Instantaneous Over-
current
Motor coasts to a stop at approx. 250% or more of Inverter rated current
Overload Motor coasts to a stop after 1 minute at 150% of Inverter rated output cur-
rent
Overvoltage Motor coasts to a stop if DC bus voltage exceeds 410 V
Undervoltage Stops when DC bus voltage is approx. 200 V or less (approx. 160 V or
less for single-phase series).
Momentary Power
Loss
The following items are selectable: Not provided (stops if power loss is 15
ms or longer), continuous operation if power loss is approx. 0.5 s or short-
er, continuous operation.
Heatsink Overheat Protected by electronic circuit.
Stall Prevention Level Can be set to individual levels during acceleration/constant-speed opera-
tion, provided/not provided available during deceleration.
Cooling Fan Fault Protected by electronic circuit (fan lock detection).
Ground Fault*4 Protected by electronic circuit (overcurrent level).*3
Power Charge
Indication
ON until the DC bus voltage becomes 50 V or less. RUN indicator stays
ON or Digital Operator indicator stays ON.
Multi-function
Input
Seven of the following input signals are selectable: Forward Run Com-
mand, Reverse Run Command, Forward/Reverse Run (3-wire sequence)
Command, Fault Reset, external fault, multi-step speed operation, Jog
Command, acceleration/deceleration time select, External Baseblock,
Speed Search Command, Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command,
LOCAL/REMOTE selection, communication/control circuit terminal selec-
tion, emergency stop fault, emergency stop alarm, Up/Down Command,
self-test, PID control cancel, PID integral reset/hold, Inverter overheat
alarm
Multi-function
Output*5
The following output signals are selectable (1 NO/NC contact output, 2
photocoupler outputs):
Fault, running, zero speed, frequency agree, frequency detection, over-
torque detection, undervoltage detection, minor error, baseblock, operat-
ing mode, Inverter run ready, fault retry, UV, speed search, data output
through communications, PID feedback loss detection, frequency refer-
ence loss, Inverter overheat alarm
Standard Functions Voltage vector control, full-range automatic torque boost, slip compensa-
tion, DC injection braking current/time at startup/stop, frequency refer-
ence bias/gain, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, max. 19.2 k
bps), PID control, energy-saving control, constant copy, frequency refer-
ence with built-in potentiometer, unit selection for frequency reference
setting/display, multi-function analog input
Voltage Class 200 V single-/3-phase
Model
CIMR-
V7AZ
3-phase 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 24P0 25P5 27P5
Single-phase B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B4P0 - -
Protective FunctionsOutput Functions
Input SignalsOutput Signals
9 Specifications
217
* 1. Based on a standard 4-pole motor for max. applicable motor output.
* 2. Shows deceleration torque for uncoupled motor decelerating from 60 Hz
with the shortest possible deceleration time.
* 3. The operation level becomes approx. 50% of Inverter rated output current
in case of Inverters of 5.5 kW or 7.5 kW.
* 4. The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the
motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following
cases.
• A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or ter-
minals.
• A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
* 5. Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA (as reference value)
* 6. For details, refer to “Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max” on
page 94.
Status
Indicators
RUN and ALARM provided as standard indicators
Digital Opera-
tor (JVOP-140)
Provided for monitor frequency reference, output frequency, output cur-
rent
Terminals Main circuit: screw terminals
Control circuit: plug-in screw terminal
Wiring Distance
between Inverter and
Motor
100 m (328 ft) or less*6
Enclosure Open chassis (IP20, IP00)*7, or enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1
(TYPE 1)*8
Cooling Method Cooling fan is provided for the following models:
200 V, 0.75 kW or larger Inverters (3-phase)
200 V, 1.5 kW or larger Inverters (single-phase)
Other models are self-cooling.
Ambient Temperature Open chassis (IP20, IP00): −10 to 50 °C (14 to 122 °F)
and enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1 (TYPE 1): −10 to 40 °C (14 to 105
°F) (not frozen)
Humidity 95% or less (non-condensing)
Storage Temperature*9 −20 to 60 °C (−4 to 140 °F)
Location Indoor (free from corrosive gases or dust)
Elevation 1,000 m (3,280 ft) or less
Vibration Up to 9.8 m/s2 (1G) at 10 to less than 20 Hz,
up to 2 m/s2 (0.2G) at 20 to 50 Hz
Voltage Class 200 V single-/3-phase
Model
CIMR-
V7AZ
3-phase 20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 24P0 25P5 27P5
Single-phase B0P1 B0P2 B0P4 B0P7 B1P5 B2P2 B4P0 - -
Other Functions
Indications
Environmental Condi-
218
* 7. 0P1 to 3P7 are of IP20. Be sure to remove the top and bottom covers
when Inverter 5P5 or 7P5 of open chassis mounting type is used.
* 8. NEMA 1 of 0P1 to 3P7 is optional, while NEMA 1 of 5P5 and 7P5 is pro-
vided as standard.
* 9. Temperature during shipping (for short period).
Standard Specifications (400 V Class)
Voltage Class 400 V 3-phase
Model
CIMR-
V7AZ
3-phase 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P0 44P0 45P5 47P5
Single-phase---------
Max. Applicable Motor Output
kW*1
0.37 0.55 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5
Inverter Capacity (kVA) 0.9 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.2 5.5 7.0 11 14
Rated Output Current
(A)
1.2 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 7.2 9.2 14.8 18
Max. Output Voltage
(V)
3-phase, 380 to 460 V (proportional to input voltage)
Max. Output
Frequency (Hz)
400 Hz (Programmable)
Rated Input Voltage
and Frequency
3-phase, 380 to 460 V, 50/60 Hz
Allowable Voltage
Fluctuation
−15 to +10%
Allowable Frequency
Fluctuation
±5%
Output CharacteristicsPower Supply
9 Specifications
219
Control Method Sine wave PWM (V/f control/vector control selectable)
Frequency Control
Range
0.1 to 400 Hz
Frequency Accuracy
(Temperature Change)
Digital reference: ±0.01 %, −10 to 50 °C (14 to 122 °F)
Analog reference: ±0.5 %, 25±10 °C (59 to 95 °F)
Frequency Setting
Resolution
Digital reference:
0.01 Hz (less than 100 Hz)/0.1 Hz (100 Hz or more)
Analog reference: 1/1000 of max. output frequency
Output Frequency
Resolution
0.01 Hz
Overload Capacity 150% rated output current for one minute
Frequency Reference
Signal
0 to 10 VDC (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) pulse train
input, frequency setting potentiometer (Selectable)
Acceleration/Decelera-
tion Time
0.00 to 6000 s
(Acceleration/deceleration time are independently programmed.)
Braking Torque Short-term average deceleration torque*2
0.2 kW: 150% or more
0.75 kW: 100% or more
1.5 kW (2 HP): 50% or more
2.2 kW (3 HP) or more: 20% or more
Continuous regenerative torque: Approx. 20% (150% with optional brak-
ing resistor, braking transistor built-in)
V/f Characteristics Possible to program any V/f pattern
Motor Overload
Protection
Electronic thermal overload relay
Instantaneous Over-
current
Motor coasts to a stop at approx. 250% or more of Inverter rated current
Overload Motor coasts to a stop after 1 minute at 150% of Inverter rated output cur-
rent
Overvoltage Motor coasts to a stop if DC bus voltage exceeds 820 V
Undervoltage Stops when DC bus voltage is approx. 400 V or less
Momentary Power
Loss
The following items are selectable: Not provided (stops if power loss is 15
ms or longer), continuous operation if power loss is approx. 0.5 s or short-
er, continuous operation.
Heatsink Overheat Protected by electronic circuit.
Stall Prevention Level Can be set to individual levels during acceleration/constant-speed opera-
tion, provided/not provided available during deceleration.
Cooling Fan Fault Protected by electronic circuit (fan lock detection).
Ground Fault*4 Protected by electronic circuit (overcurrent level).*3
Power Charge
Indication
ON until the DC bus voltage becomes 50 V or less. Charge LED is pro-
vided.
Voltage Class 400 V 3-phase
Model
CIMR-
V7AZ
3-phase 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P0 44P0 45P5 47P5
Single-phase---------
Control CharacteristicsProtective Functions
220
Multi-function
Input
Seven of the following input signals are selectable: Forward Run Com-
mand, Reverse Run Command, Forward/Reverse Run (3-wire sequence)
Command, Fault Reset, external fault, multi-step speed operation, Jog
Command, acceleration/deceleration time select, External Baseblock,
Speed Search Command, Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command,
LOCAL/REMOTE selection, communication/control circuit terminal selec-
tion, emergency stop fault, emergency stop alarm, Up/Down Command,
self-test, PID control cancel, PID integral reset/hold, Inverter overheat
alarm
Multi-function
Output*5
The following output signals are selectable (1 NO/NC contact output, 2
photocoupler outputs):
Fault, running, zero speed, frequency agree, frequency detection, over-
torque detection, undertorque detection, minor error, baseblock, operat-
ing mode, Inverter run ready, fault retry, UV, speed search, data output
through communications, PID feedback loss detection, frequency refer-
ence loss, Inverter overheat alarm
Standard Functions Voltage vector control, full-range automatic torque boost, slip compensa-
tion, DC injection braking current/time at startup/stop, frequency refer-
ence bias/gain, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, max. 19.2
kbps), PID control, energy-saving control, constant copy, frequency refer-
ence with built-in potentiometer, unit selection for frequency reference
setting/display, multi-function analog input
Status Indica-
tors
RUN and ALARM provided as standard indicators
Digital
Operator
(JVOP-140)
Monitor frequency reference, output frequency, and output current provid-
ed.
Terminals Main circuit: screw terminals
Control circuit: plug-in screw terminal
Wiring Distance
between Inverter and
Motor
100 m (328 ft) or less*6
Enclosure Open chassis (IP20, IP00)*7, or enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1
(TYPE 1) *8
Cooling Method Cooling fan is provided for the following models:
400 V, 1.5 kW or larger Inverters (3-phase)
Other models are self-cooling.
Ambient Temperature Open chassis (IP20, IP00): −10 to 50 °C (14 to 122 °F)
Enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1 (TYPE 1): −10 to 40 °C (14 to 105°F)
(not frozen)
Humidity 95 % or less (non-condensing)
Storage Temperature*9 −20 to 60 °C (−4 to 140 °F)
Location Indoor (free from corrosive gases or dust)
Elevation 1,000 m (3,280 ft) or less
Vibration Up to 9.8 m/s2 (1G) at 10 to less than 20 Hz,
up to 2 m/s2 (0.2G) at 20 to 50 Hz
Voltage Class 400 V 3-phase
Model
CIMR-
V7AZ
3-phase 40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P0 44P0 45P5 47P5
Single-phase---------
Output Functions
Input SignalsOutput Signals
Other Functions
Indications
Environmental Condi-
9 Specifications
221
* 1. Based on a standard 4-pole motor for max. applicable motor output.
* 2. Shows deceleration torque for uncoupled motor decelerating from 60 Hz
with the shortest possible deceleration time.
* 3. The operation level becomes approx. 50% of Inverter rated output current
in case of Inverters of 5.5 kW or 7.5 kW.
* 4. The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the
motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following
cases.
• A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or ter-
minals.
• A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
* 5. Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA (as reference value)
* 6. For details, refer to “Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max” on
page 94.
* 7. 0P1 to 3P7 are of IP20. Be sure to remove the top and bottom covers
when Inverter 5P5 or 7P5 of open chassis mounting type is used.
* 8. NEMA 1 of 0P1 to 3P7 is optional, while NEMA 1 of 5P5 and 7P5 is pro-
vided as standard.
* 9. Temperature during shipping (for short period).
222
Standard Wiring
Shielded twisted-pair cable
Shielded
: Only basic insulation (protective class 1, overvoltage category II) is provided for the
control circuit terminals. Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product to
conform to CE requirements.
*1. Short-circuit bar should be removed when connecting a DC reactor.
*2. Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA (as reference value)
P
R
S
T
S1
+2 +1 B1 B2−
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
SC
SW1 NPN
+24V
PNP
RP
FS
FR
PP
2kΩ
FC
R+
R-
S+
S-
MIN MAX
FM
P
P0 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
P
GND
IIN
VIN
AM
PC
MC
MB
MA
W/T3
V/T2
U/T1
T/L3
S/L2
R/L1
UX
P1
P2
1
2
3
AC
CN2
0V
Frequency Setting
Potentiometer
Reference Pulse Train
(Max. 33 kHz)
Frequency Reference
0 to +10 V (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)/0 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
Frequency Setting Power
Supply (+12 V 20 mA)
Digital Operator
Frequency
Setting
Potentiometer
IM
P
P
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Fault Reset
Multi-step
Speed Ref. 1
Multi-step
Speed Ref. 2
Jog Command
For Single-
phase.
Use R/L1
and S/L2.
Multi-function input
External Fault
(NO Contact)
Power Supply
DC Reactor
(Optional) Thermal
Overload
Relay
Braking Resistor
(Optional)
Short-circuit bar*1
MCCB
Frequency Ref.
Pulse Train Input
MEMOBUS
Communications
RS-485/422
Max. 19.2 kbps
Grounding
Multi-function
Contact Output*2
250 VAC: 1 A or less
30 VDC: 1 A or less
Fault
Running
Frequency
Agreed
Multi-function
Photocoupler
Output
+48 VDC, 50 mA
or less
Analog Monitor
Output
0 to +10 VDC (2 mA)
Multi-function
analog input
Output
Frequency
Analog Monitor/Pulse
Monitor Selectable
Shield connection
terminal
Terminal Resistance
(1/2 W, 120 Ω)
9 Specifications
223
Connection Example of Braking Resistor
* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting n092 to 1 when using
a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration
time if this setting is not changed.
Terminal Descriptions
Type Terminal Name Function (Signal Level)
Main Circuit
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
AC power supply input Use main circuit power input. (Use terminals R/L1 and S/
L2 for single-phase Inverters. Never use terminal T/L3.)
U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
Inverter output Inverter output
B1, B2 Braking resistor con-
nection
Braking resistor connection
+2, +1 DC reactor connection When connecting optional DC reactor, remove the main
circuit short-circuit bar between +2 and +1.
+1, - DC power supply
input DC power supply input (+1: positive −: negative)*1
Grounding For grounding (according to the local grounding codes)
3-phase
Power
Supply
Fault Contact
Overload Relay
Trip Contact
Braking
Resistor *
Motor
Braking Resistor Unit
Overload Relay Trip Contact
224
Control Circuit
Input
Sequence
S1 Multi-function input
selection 1
Factory setting closed: FWD run
open: Stop Photocoupler
insulation, 24
VDC, 8 mA
S2 Multi-function input
selection 2
Factory setting closed: REV run
open: Stop
S3 Multi-function input
selection 3
Factory setting: External fault
(NO contact)
S4 Multi-function input
selection 4
Factory setting: Fault reset
S5 Multi-function input
selection 5
Factory setting: Multi-step speed
reference 1
S6 Multi-function input
selection 6
Factory setting: Multi-step speed
reference 2
S7 Multi-function input
selection 7
Factory Setting: Jog Command
SC Multi-function input
selection common
For control signal
Frequency reference
RP Master reference
pulse train input
33 kHz max.
FS Power for frequency
setting
+12 V (permissible current 20 mA max.)
FR Master frequency
reference
0 to +10 VDC (20 kΩ) or 4 to 20 mA (250 kΩ) or 0 to 20
mA (250 Ω) (1/1000 resolution)
FC Frequency reference
common
0 V
Output
Multi-function contact output
MA NO contact output Factory setting: fault Contact capacity
250 VAC: 1 A or less,*3
30 VDC: 1 A or less
MB NC contact output
MC Contact output
common
P1 Photocoupler output 1 Factory setting: Run Photocoupler
output +48 VDC,
50 mA or less
P2 Photocoupler output 2 Factory setting: Frequency agree
PC Photocoupler output
common
0 V
AM Analog monitor output
*2
Factory setting:
Output frequency
0 to +10 V
0 to +10 VDC, 2 mA or less,
8-bit resolution
AC Analog monitor
common
0 V
Type Terminal Name Function (Signal Level)
9 Specifications
225
* 1. DC power supply input terminal does not conform to CE/UL standards.
* 2. Can be switched to pulse monitor output.
* 3. Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA (as reference value)
Communication Circuit Terminal
MEMOBUS communications
R+ Communications
input (+)
MEMOBUS
communications
Run through RS-485
or RS-422.
RS-485/422 MEMOBUS
protocol 19.2 kbps max.
R- Communications
input (-)
S+ Communications
output (+)
S- Communications
output (-)
Type Terminal Name Function (Signal Level)
226
Sequence Input Connection with NPN/PNP
Transistor
Sequence Connection with NPN Transistor (0 V Common)
When connecting sequence inputs (S1 to S7)
with a transistor, turn the rotary switch SW1
depending on the polarity (0 V common: NPN side,
+24 V common: PNP side).
Factory setting: NPN side
⇣Ᏹ䊥 䉶䉾 䊃
V7AZ
SW1 NPN
PNP
+24 V
SC
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
External Fault (NO)
Fault Reset
Multi-step Speed Reference 1
Multi-step Speed Reference 2
Jog
Multi-
function
input
9 Specifications
227
Sequence Connection with PNP Transistor (+24 V Common)
V7AZ
SW1 NPN
PNP
+24 V
SC
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
External
power
supply
+24V
Jog
Multi-step Speed
Reference 1
Multi-step Speed
Reference 2
Fault Reset
External
Fault (NO)
Reverse
Run/Stop
Forward
Run/Stop
Multi-
function
input
228
Dimensions/Heat Loss
H1
H2
H
W1
W
H2
W1
W
2-d
H1
H
4-d
D
D
Fig. 2
Fig. 1
8.5
(0.33)
8.5
(0.33)
1.5
(0.06)
1.5
(0.06)
9 Specifications
229
Dimensions in mm (inches)/Mass in kg (lb)/Heat Loss (W)
Voltage
class
Capaci-
ty (kW)
W H D W1 H1 H2 d Mass Heat Loss (W) Fig.
Heat-
sink
Unit Total
200 V
3-phase
0.1 68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
76
(2.99)
56
(2.20)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 0.6
(1.32)
3.7 9.3 13.0 1
0.25 68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
76
(2.99)
56
(2.20)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 0.6
(1.32)
7.7 10.3 18.0 1
0.55 68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
108
(4.25)
56
(2.20)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 0.9
(1.98)
15.8 12.3 28.1 1
1.1 68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
128
(5.04)
56
(2.20)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.1
(2.43)
28.4 16.7 45.1 1
1.5 108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
131
(5.16)
96
(3.78)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.4
(3.09)
53.7 19.1 72.8 2
2.2 108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
140
(5.51)
96
(3.78)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.5
(3.3)
60.4 34.4 94.8 2
4.0 140
(5.51)
128
(5.04)
143
(5.63)
128
(5.04)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 2.1
(4.62)
96.7 52.4 149.1 2
5.5 180 260 170 164 244 8 M5 4.6 170.4 79.4 249.8 3
7.5 180 260 170 164 244 8 M5 4.8 219.2 98.9 318.1 3
4-d
W1 8.5 D
W
H1H2
H
Fig. 3
230
Note: Remove the top and bottom covers so that Inverters of 5.5/7.5 kW (200/
400 V Classes) can be used as IP00.
200 V
single-
phase
0.1 68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
76
(2.99)
56
(2.20)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 0.6
(1.32)
3.7 10.4 14.1 1
0.25 68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
73
(2.99)
56
(2.20)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 0.7
(1.54)
7.7 12.3 20.0 1
0.55 68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
131
(5.16)
56
(2.20)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.0
(2.20)
15.8 16.1 31.9 1
1.1 108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
140
(5.51)
96
(3.78)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.5
(3.31)
28.4 23.0 51.4 2
1.5 108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
156
(6.14)
96
(3.78)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.5
(3.31)
53.7 29.1 82.8 2
2.2 140
(5.51)
128
(5.04)
163
(6.42)
128
(5.04)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 2.2
(4.84)
64.5 49.1 113.6 2
4.0 170
(6.69)
128
(5.04)
180
(7.09)
158
(6.22)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 2.9
(6.38)
98.2 78.2 176.4 2
400 V
3-phase
0.37 108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
92
(3.62)
96
(3.78)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.0
(2.20)
9.4 13.7 23.1 2
0.55 108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
110
(4.43)
96
(3.78)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.1
(2.43)
15.1 15.0 30.1 2
1.1 108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
140
(5.51)
96
(3.78)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.5
(3.31)
30.3 24.6 54.9 2
1.5 108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
156
(6.14)
96
(3.78)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.5
(3.31)
45.8 29.9 75.7 2
2.2 108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
156
(6.14)
96
(3.78)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 1.5
(3.31)
50.5 32.5 83.0 2
3.0 140
(5.51)
128
(5.04)
143
(5.63)
128
(5.04)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 2.1
(4.62)
58.2 37.6 95.8 2
4.0 140
(5.51)
128
(5.04)
143
(5.63)
128
(5.04)
118
(4.65)
5
(0.20)
M4 2.1
(4.62)
79.9 49.2 129.1 2
5.5 180 260 170 164 244 8 M5 4.8 168.8 87.7 256.5 3
7.5 180 260 170 164 244 8 M5 4.8 209.6 99.3 308.9 3
Voltage
class
Capaci-
ty (kW)
W H D W1 H1 H2 d Mass Heat Loss (W) Fig.
Heat-
sink
Unit Total
9 Specifications
231
Recommended Peripheral Devices
It is recommended that the following peripheral devices be mounted
between the AC main circuit power supply and V7AZ input terminals
R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3.
• MCCB (Molded-case Circuit Breaker)/Fuse:
Always connect for wiring protection.
• Magnetic Contactor:
Mount a surge suppressor on the coil. (Refer to the table shown
below.) When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the
Inverter, do not exceed one start per hour.
Recommended MCCB Magnetic Contactors and Fuses
• 200 V 3-phase
• 200 V Single-phase
V7AZ Model V7**
20P1
V7**
20P2
V7**
20P4
V7**
20P7
V7**
21P5
V7**
22P2
V7**
24P0
V7**
25P5
V7**
27P5
Capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7 9.5 13.0
Rated Output Current (A) 0.8 1.6 3 5 8 11 17.5 25.0 33.0
MCCB type NF30
(MITSUBISHI)
5 A 5 A 5 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 50 A 60A
Magnetic contac-
tor (Fuji Electric FA
Components &
Systems)
Without
reactor
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-4-0
(18A)
SC-N1
(26A)
SC-N2
(35A)
SC-
N2S
(50A)
SC-N3
(65A)
With
reactor
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-4-0
(18A)
SC-N1
(26A)
SC-N2
(35A)
SC-
N2S
(50A)
Fuse (UL Class RK5) 5 A 5 A 5 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 50 A 60 A
V7AZ Model V7**
B0P1
V7**
B0P2
V7**
B0P4
V7**
B0P7
V7**
B1P5
V7**
B2P2
V7**
B4P0
Capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7
Rated Output Current (A) 0.8 1.6 3 5 8 11 17.5
MCCB type NF30, NF50
(MITSUBISHI)
5 A 5 A 10 A 20 A 30 A 40 A 50 A
Magnetic contactor
(Fuji Electric FA
Components &
Systems)
Without
reactor
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-4-0
(18A)
SC-N2
(35A)
SC-N2
(35A)
SC-N2S
(50A)
With
reactor
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-4-0
(18A)
SC-N1
(26A)
SC-N2
(35A)
SC-N2S
(50A)
232
• 400 V 3-phase
Surge Suppressors
• Ground Fault Interrupter:
Select a ground fault interrupter not affected by high frequencies. To
prevent malfunctions, the current should be 200 mA or higher and
the operating time 0.1 s or longer.
Example:
• NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in 1988
and after)
• EGSG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in 1984 and
after)
Fuse (UL Class RK5) 5 A 5 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 40 A 50 A
V7AZ Model V7**
40P2
V7**
40P4
V7**
40P7
V7**
41P5
V7**
42P2
V7**
43P0
V7**
43P0
V7**
45P5
V7**
47P5
Capacity (kVA) 0.9 1.4 2.6 3.7 4.2 5.5 7.0 11.0 14.0
Rated Output Current (A) 1.2 1.8 3.4 4.8 5.5 7.2 9.2 14.8 18.0
MCCB type NF30, NF50 (MIT-
SUBISHI)
5 A 5 A 5 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 30 A
Magnetic contactor
(Fuji Electric FA
Components &
Systems)
Without
reactor
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-4-0
(18A)
SC-4-0
(18A)
SC-N1
(26A)
SC-N2
(35A)
SC-N2
(35A)
With
reactor
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-4-0
(18A)
SC-N1
(26A)
SC-N2
(35A)
Fuse (UL Class RK5) 5 A 5 A 5 A 10 A 10 A 20 A 20 A 30 A 30 A
Model
DCR2-
Specifications Code No.
200 V to
230 V
Large size magnetic
contactors
50A22E 250 VAC
0.5 μF 200 ΩC002417
Control relays
MY-2, -3 (OMRON)
HH-22, -23 (FUJI)
MM-2, -4 (OMRON)
10A25C 250 VAC
0.1 μF 100 ΩC002482
V7AZ Model V7**
B0P1
V7**
B0P2
V7**
B0P4
V7**
B0P7
V7**
B1P5
V7**
B2P2
V7**
B4P0
Surge Suppressors
Coils and Relays
9 Specifications
233
• AC and DC Reactor:
Install an AC reactor to connect to a power supply transformer of
large capacity (600 kVA or more) or to improve power factor on the
power supply side.
• Noise Filter:
Use a noise filter exclusively for the Inverter if radio noise generated
from the Inverter causes other control devices to malfunction.
1. Never connect a general LC/RC noise filter to the Inverter
output circuit.
2. Do not connect a phase-advancing capacitor to the I/O
sides and/or a surge suppressor to the output side.
3. When a magnetic contactor is installed between the
Inverter and the motor, do not turn it ON/OFF during
operation.
For the details of the peripheral devices, refer to the catalog.
NOTE
234
Constants List
First Functions (Constants n001 to n049)
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
001 0101H Password 0 to 6,
12, 13
-1No53
002 0102 Control Mode Selection
(Note 6)
0, 1 - 0
(Note 1,
6)
No 59
003 0103 Run Command Selection 0 to 3 - 0 No 64
004 0104 Frequency Reference
Selection
0 to 9 - 1 No 65
005 0105 Stopping Method Selection 0, 1 - 0 No 106
006 0106 Reverse Run Prohibit 0, 1 - 0 No 74
007 0107 Stop Key Selection 0, 1 - 0 No 98
008 0108 Frequency Reference
Selection in Local Mode
0, 1 - 0
(Note 5)
No 65
009 0109 Frequency Reference Setting
Method from Digital Operator
0, 1 - 0 No 65
010 010A Detecting Fault Contact of
Digital Operator
0, 1 - 0 No 64
011 010B Max. Output Frequency 50.0 to 400.0
Hz
0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz No 55
012 010C Max. Voltage 0.1 to 255.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V 200.0 V
(Note 2)
No 55
013 010D Max. Voltage Output
Frequency
0.2 to 400.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz No 55
014 010E Mid. Output Frequency 0.1 to 399.9 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.3 Hz
(Note 6)
No 55
015 010F Mid. Output Frequency
Voltage
0.1 to 255.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V 12.0 V
(Note 2,
6)
No 55
016 0110 Min. Output Frequency 0.1 to 10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.3 Hz
(Note 6)
No 55
017 0111 Min. Output Frequency
Voltage
0.1 to 50.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V 12.0 V
(Note 2,
6)
No 55
018 0112 Selecting Setting Unit for Ac-
celeration/deceleration Time
0, 1 - 0 No 79
9 Specifications
235
019 0113 Acceleration Time 1 0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s Yes 78
020 0114 Deceleration Time 1 0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s Yes 78
021 0115 Acceleration Time 2 0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s Yes 78
022 0116 Deceleration Time 2 0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s Yes 78
023 0117 S-curve Selection 0 to 3 - 0 No 80
024 0118 Frequency Reference 1
(Master Frequency
Reference)
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
6.00 Hz Yes 74
025 0119 Frequency Reference 2 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
026 011A Frequency Reference 3 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
027 011B Frequency Reference 4 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
028 011C Frequency Reference 5 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
029 011D Frequency Reference 6 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
030 011E Frequency Reference 7 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
031 011F Frequency Reference 8 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
236
032 0120 Jog Frequency 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
6.00 Hz Yes 75
033 0121 Frequency Reference Upper
Limit
0% to 110% 1% 100% No 77
034 0122 Frequency Reference Lower
Limit
0% to 110% 1% 0% No 77
035 0123 Setting/Displaying Unit Selec-
tion for Frequency Reference
0 to 3999 - 0 No 182
036 0124 Motor Rated Current 0% to 150% of
Inverter rated
current
0.1 A (Note 3) No 136
037 0125 Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Selection
0 to 4 - 0 No 136,
103
038 0126 Electronic Thermal Motor Pro-
tection Time Constant Setting
1 to 60 min 1 min 8 min No 136
039 0127 Selecting Cooling Fan
Operation
0, 1 - 0 No 141
040 0128 Motor Rotation Direction 0, 1 - 0 No 41
041 0129 Acceleration Time 3 0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s Yes 78
042 012A Deceleration Time 3 0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s Yes 78
043 012B Acceleration Time 4 0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s Yes 78
044 012C Deceleration Time 4 0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s Yes 78
045 012D Frequency Reference Bias
Step Amount (Up/Down
Command 2)
0.00 Hz to
99.99 Hz
0.01 Hz 0.00
Hz
Yes 115
046 012E Frequency Reference Bias
Accel/Decel Rate (Up/Down
Command 2)
0, 1 - 0 Yes 115
047 012F Frequency Reference Bias
Operation Mode Selection
(Up/Down Command 2)
0, 1 - 0 Yes 115
048 0130 Frequency Reference Bias
Value (Up/Down Command
2)
-99.9% to
100.0%
n011=100%
0.1% 0.0% No 115
049 0131 Analog Frequency Refer-
ence Fluctuation Limit Lev-
el (Up/Down Command 2)
0.1% to
100.0%
n011=100%
0.1% 1.0% Yes 115
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
9 Specifications
237
Second Functions (Constants n050 to n079)
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
050 0132 Multi-function Input Selection
1 (Terminal S1) 1 to 37 -1No110
051 0133 Multi-function Input Selection
2 (Terminal S2) 1 to 37 -2No110
052 0134 Multi-function Input Selection
3 (Terminal S3) 0 to 37 -3No110
053 0135 Multi-function Input Selection
4 (Terminal S4) 1 to 37 -5No110
054 0136 Multi-function Input Selection
5 (Terminal S5) 1 to 37 -6No110
055 0137 Multi-function Input Selection
6 (Terminal S6) 1 to 37 -7No110
056 0138 Multi-function Input Selection
7 (Terminal S7) 1 to 37 -10No110
057 0139 Multi-function Output
Selection 1 0 to 22 -0No124
058 013A Multi-function Output
Selection 2 0 to 22 -1No124
059 013B Multi-function Output
Selection 3 0 to 22 -2No124
060 013C Analog Frequency Reference
Gain
0 % to 255 % 1 % 100 % Yes 76
061 013D Analog Frequency Reference
Bias
-100 % to 100
%
1 % 0 % Yes 76
062 013E Filter Time Constant for
Analog Frequency Reference
0.00 to 2.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s Yes -
063 013F Watchdog Error Operation Se-
lection (For SI-T/V7)
0 to 4 - 0 No 191
064 0140 Frequency Reference Loss
Detection Selection
0, 1 - 0 No 183
065 0141 Monitor Output Type 0, 1 - 0 No 91
066 0142 Monitor Item Selection 0 to 8 - 0 No 90
067 0143 Monitor Gain 0.00 to 2.00 0.01 1.00 Yes 91
068 0144 Analog Frequency Reference
Gain (Voltage input from
Operator)
−255% to
255%
1% 100% Yes 167
069 0145 Analog Frequency Reference
Bias (Voltage input from
Operator)
−100% to
100%
1% 0% Yes 167
238
Third Functions (Constants n080 to n119)
070 0146 Analog Frequency Reference
Filter Time Constant (Voltage
input from Operator)
0.00 to 2.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s Yes 167
071 0147 Analog Frequency Reference
Gain (Current input from
Operator)
−255% to
255%
1% 100% Yes 167
072 0148 Analog Frequency Reference
Bias (Current input from
Operator)
−100% to
100%
1% 0% Yes 167
073 0149 Analog Frequency Reference
Filter Time Constant (Current
input from Operator)
0.00 to 2.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s Yes 167
074 014A Pulse Train Frequency
Reference Gain
0 % to 255 % 1 % 100 % Yes -
075 014B Pulse Train Frequency
Reference Bias
-100 % to 100
%
1 % 0 % Yes -
076 014C Pulse Train Frequency Filter
Time Constant
0.00 to 2.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s Yes -
077 014D Multi-function Analog Input
Function
0 to 4 - 0 No 121
078 014E Multi-function Analog Input
Signal Selection
0, 1 - 0 No 120
079 014F Frequency Reference Bias
(FBIAS) Value
0 % to 50 % 1 % 10 % No 120
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
080 0150 Carrier Frequency Selection 1 to 4, 7 to 9,
12
- (Note 4) No 94
081 0151 Momentary Power Loss Ride-
through Method
0 to 2
(Note 9)
-0No79
082 0152 Automatic Retry Attempts 0 to 10 times - 0 No 84
083 0153 Jump Frequency 1 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz No 84
084 0154 Jump Frequency 2 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz No 84
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
9 Specifications
239
085 0155 Jump Frequency 3 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz No 84
086 0156 Jump Frequency Range 0.00 to 25.50
Hz
0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz No 84
087 0157 Cumulative Operation Time
Function Selection (Note 8)
0, 1 - 0 No -
088 0158 Cumulative Operation Time
(Note 8)
0 to 6550 1 = 10H 0H No -
089 0159 DC Injection Braking Current 0 to 100 % 1% 50% No 89
090 015A DC Injection Braking Time at
Stop
0.0 to 25.5 s 0.1 s 0.5 s No 107
091 015B DC Injection Braking Time at
Startup
0.0 to 25.5 s 0.1 s 0.0 s No 89
092 015C Stall Prevention during
Deceleration
0, 1 - 0 No 134
093 015D Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration
30% to 200% 1% 170% No 131
094 015E Stall Prevention Level during
Running
30% to 200% 1% 160% No 134
095 015F Frequency Detection Level 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz No 82
096 0160 Overtorque Detection
Function Selection 1
0 to 4 - 0 No 81
097 0161 Overtorque/Undertorque De-
tection Function Selection 2
0, 1 - 0 No 82
098 0162 Overtorque Detection Level 30% to 200% 1% 160% No 82
099 0163 Overtorque Detection Time 0.1 to 10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s No 82
100 0164 Hold Output Frequency
Saving Selection
0, 1 - 0 No 114
101 0165 Speed Search Deceleration
Time
0.1 to 10.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s No 89
102 0166 Speed Search Operation
Level
0 % to 200 % 1 % 150 % No 89
103 0167 Torque Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 1.0 Yes 58
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
240
104 0168 Torque Compensation Time
Constant
0.0 to 25.5 s 0.1 s 0.3 s
(Note 6)
No 58
105 0169 Torque Compensation Iron
Loss
0.0 to 6550 0.01 W (less
than 1000
W)/1 W
(1000 W or
more)
(Note 3) No 58
106 016A Motor Rated Slip 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 0.1 Hz (Note 3) Yes 60
107 016B Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance
0.000 to 65.50
Ω0.001 Ω
(less than 10
Ω)/0.01 Ω
(10 Ω or
more)
(Note 3) No 60
108 016C Motor Leakage Inductance 0.00 to
655.0 mH
0.01 mH
(less than
100 mH)/0.1
mH (100 mH
or more)
(Note 3) No 61
109 016D Torque Compensation
Voltage Limiter
0% to 250% 1% 150% No -
110 016E Motor No-load Current 0% to 99% 1% (Note 3) No 59
111 016F Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0
(Note 6)
Yes 1 35
112 0170 Slip Compensation Time
Constant
0.0 to 25.5 s 0.1 s 2.0 s
(Note 6)
No 135
113 0171 Slip Compensation during
Regenerative Operation
0, 1 - 0 No -
114 0172 Number of Transmission Cy-
cle Error Detection (For SI-T/
V7)
2 to 10 - 2 No 191
115 0173 Stall Prevention above Base
Speed during Run
0, 1 - 0 No 133
116 0174 Acceleration/Deceleration
Time during Stall Prevention
0, 1 - 0 No 133
117 0175 Undertorque Detection
Function Selection 1
0 to 4 - 0 No 186
118 0176 Undertorque Detection Level 0% to 200% 1% 10% No 186
119 0177 Undertorque Detection Time 0.1 to 10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s No 186
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
9 Specifications
241
Fourth Functions (Constants n120 to n179)
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
120 0178 Frequency Reference 9 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
121 0179 Frequency Reference 10 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
122 017A Frequency Reference 11 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
123 017B Frequency Reference 12 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
124 017C Frequency Reference 13 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
125 017D Frequency Reference 14 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
126 017E Frequency Reference 15 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
127 017F Frequency Reference 16 0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz Yes 74
128 0180 PID Control Selection 0 to 8 - 0 No 159
129 0181 PID Feedback Gain 0.00 to 10.00
Hz
0.01 1.00 Yes 162
130 0182 Proportional Gain (P) 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 1.0 Yes 161
131 0183 Integral Time (I) 0.0 to 360.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s Yes 161
132 0184 Derivative Time (D) 0.00 to 2.50 s 0.01 s 0.00 Yes 161
242
133 0185 PID Offset Adjustment −100% to
100%
1% 0% Yes 162
134 0186 Upper Limit of Integral Values 0% to 100% 1% 100% Yes 161
135 0187 Primary Delay Time Constant
for PID Output
0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s Yes 162
136 0188 Selection of PID Feedback
Loss Detection
0 to 2 - 0 No 163
137 0189 PID Feedback Loss Detection
Level
0% to 100% 1% 0% No 163
138 018A PID Feedback Loss Detection
Time
0.0 to 25.5 s 0.1 s 1.0 s No 163
139 018B Autotuning Selection 0 to 2 - 0 No 66
140 018C Motor 2 Maximum Output Fre-
quency
50.0 to
400.0 Hz
0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz No 99
141 018D PTC Thermistor Input Motor
Overheat Protection Selection
0 to 7 - 0 No 139
142 018E Motor Temperature Input Filter
Time Constant
0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 s 0.2 s Yes 139
143 018F Sequence Input Redundant
Reading Selection (Stop Posi-
tion Control Selection)
0 to 2 - 0 No 108
144 0190 Stop Position Control Com-
pensation Gain
0.50 to 2.55 0.1 1.00 No 108
145 0191 Bi-directional Function Selec-
tion
0, 1 - 0 No 163
146 0192 Frequency Offset Selection 0 to 29 - 0 No 85
147 0193 Motor 2 Maximum Voltage
Output Frequency
0.2 to
400.0 Hz
0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz No 99
148 0194 UV fault storage selection 0,1 - 0 No -
149 0195 Pulse Train Input Scaling 100 to 3300 1 = 10 Hz 2500
(25 kHz)
No 128
150 0196 Pulse Monitor Output
Frequency Selection
0, 1, 6, 12, 24,
36, 40 to 45,
50
-0No92
151 0197 MEMOBUS Timeover
Detection
0 to 4 - 0 No 143
152 0198 MEMOBUS Frequency
Reference and Frequency
Monitor Unit
0 to 3 - 0 No 143
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
9 Specifications
243
153 0199 MEMOBUS Slave Address 0 to 32 - 0 No 144
154 019A MEMOBUS BPS Selection 0 to 3 - 2 No 144
155 019B MEMOBUS Parity Selection 0 to 2 - 0 No 144
156 019C Transmission Waiting Time 10 to 65 ms 1 ms 10 ms No 144
157 019D RTS Control 0, 1 - 0 No 144
158 019E Motor 2 Maximum Voltage 0.1 to 255.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V 200.0 V
(Note 2)
No 99
159 019F Motor 2 Mid. Output
Frequency Voltage
0.1 to 255.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V 12.0 V
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
No 99
160 01A0 Motor 2 Minimum Output
Frequency Voltage
0.1 to 50.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V 12.0 V
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
No 99
161 01A1 Motor 2 Rated Current 0% to 150% of
Inverter rated
current
0.1 A (Note 3) No 99
162 0192 Motor 2 Rated Slip 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 0.1 Hz (Note 3) No 99
163 01A3 PID Output Gain 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 1.0 No 162
164 01A4 PID Feedback Value Selection 0 to 5 - 0 No 160
165 01A5 Externally Mounting Type
Braking Resistor Overheat
Protection Selection (Note 7)
0, 1 - 0 No -
166 01A6 Input Open-phase Detection
Level
0% to 100% 1% 0% No 184
167 01A7 Input Open-phase Detection
Time
0 to 255 s 1 s 0 s No 184
168 01A8 Output Open-phase Detection
Level
0% to 100% 1% 0% No 184
169 01A9 Output Open-phase Detection
Time
0.0 to 2.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s No 184
170 01AA Enter Command Operation
Selection (MEMOBUS
communications)
0, 1 - 0 No 155
171 01AB Frequency Reference Bias
Upper Limit (Up/Down Com-
mand 2)
0.0% to
100.0%
(n011 = 100%)
0.1% 0.0% Yes 115
172 01AC Frequency Reference Bias
Lower Limit (Up/Down Com-
mand 2)
-99.9% to
0.0%
(n011 = 100%)
0.1% 0.0% Yes 115
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
244
Note: 1. Not initialized by constant initialization.
2. Upper limit of setting range and factory setting are doubled for 400 V
Class.
3. Depends on Inverter capacity. Refer to the next page.
4. Depends on Inverter capacity. Refer to page 96.
5. Factory setting of the model with JVOP-140 Digital Operator (with
potentiometer) is 0. Setting can be set to 1 by constant initialization.
6. When control mode selection (n002) is changed, factory setting corre-
sponds to the control mode. Refer to the next page.
7. Constant that is provided for 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW Inverters of 200 V
and 400 V Classes.
8. 1 (Enabled) for 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW Inverters of 200 V and 400 V
Classes.
9. Do not select 3 to 100 as they are reserved for future use.
173 01AD DC Injection Braking
Proportional Gain
1 to 999 1 = 0.001 83
(0.083)
No -
174 01AE DC Injection Braking Integral
Time Constant
1 to 250 1 = 4 ms 25 (100
ms)
No -
175 01AF Reducing Carrier Frequency
Selection at Low Speed
0, 1 - 0
(Note 8)
No 97
176 01B0 Constant Copy Function
Selection
rdy, r Ed, CPy,
vFy, vA, Sno
-rdyNo 168
177 01B1 Constant Read Selection
Prohibit
0, 1 - 0 No 169
178 01B2 Fault History Stores, dis-
plays most
recent 4
alarms
Setting
disabled
-No 49
179 01B3 Software Version No. Displays
lower-place 4
digits of soft-
ware No.
Setting
disabled
-No -
No. Register
No. for
Trans-
mission
Name Setting Range Setting Unit Factory
Setting
Change
during
Opera-
tion
User
Set-
ting
Ref.
Page
9 Specifications
245
* 1. Values are doubled for 400 V Class.
* 2. 10.0 V for 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW Inverters of 200 V Class and 20.0 V of
400 V Class.
Factory Settings That Change with the Inverter Capacity
• 200 V Class 3-phase
* Sets the value of the motor resistance for one phase.
No. Name V/f Control
Mode
(n002 = 0)
Vector Con-
trol Mode
(n002 = 1)
n014 Mid. Output Frequency 1.3 Hz 3.0 Hz
n015 Mid. Output Frequency Voltage 12.0 V*1 *2 11.0 V*1
n016 Min. Output Frequency 1.3 Hz 1.0 Hz
n017 Min. Output Frequency Voltage 12.0 V*1 *2 4.3 V*1
n104 Torque Compensation Time Constant 0.3 s 0.2 s
n111 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 1.0
n112 Slip Compensation Gain Time Constant 2.0 s 0.2 s
No. Name Unit Factory Setting
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.1
kW
0.25
kW
0.55
kW
1.1
kW
1.5
kW
2.2
kW
4.0
kW
5.5
kW
7.5
kW
n036 Motor Rated Current A 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.3 6.2 8.5 14.1 19.6 26.6
n105 Torque Compensation
Iron Loss
W 1.7 3.4 4.2 6.5 11.1 11.8 19 28.8 43.9
n106 Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.5 2.6 2.9 2.5 2.6 2.9 3.3 1.5 1.3
n107 Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance *
Ω17.99 10.28 4.573 2.575 1.233 0.8 0.385 0.199 0.111
n108 Motor Leakage
Inductance
mH 110.4 56.08 42.21 19.07 13.4 9.81 6.34 4.22 2.65
n110 Motor No-load Current % 72 73 62 55 45 35 32 26 30
n159 Motor 2 Mid. Output
Frequency Voltage
V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 10.0 10.0
n160 Motor 2 Min. Output
Frequency Voltage
V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 10.0 10.0
246
• 200 V Class Single-phase
* Sets the value of the motor resistance for one phase.
• 400 V Class 3-phase
* Sets the value of the motor resistance for one phase.
No. Name Unit Factory Setting
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.1 kW 0.25 kW 0.55 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 4.0 kW
n036 Motor Rated Current A 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.3 6.2 8.5 14.1
n105 Torque Compensation Iron
Loss
W 1.7 3.4 4.2 6.5 11.1 11.8 19
n106 Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.5 2.6 2.9 2.5 2.6 2.9 3.3
n107 Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance *
Ω17.99 10.28 4.573 2.575 1.233 0.8 0.385
n108 Motor Leakage Inductance mH 110.4 56.08 42.21 19.07 13.4 9.81 6.34
n110 Motor No-load Current % 72 73 62 55 45 35 32
n159 Motor 2 Mid. Output
Frequency Voltage
V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0
n160 Motor 2 Min. Output
Frequency Voltage
V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0
No. Name Unit Factory Setting
- Inverter Capacity kW 0.37
kW
0.55
kW
1.1
kW
1.5
kW
2.2
kW
3.0
kW
4.0
kW
5.5
kW
7.5
kW
n036 Motor Rated Current A 0.6 1.0 1.6 3.1 4.2 7.0 7.0 9.8 13.3
n105 Torque Compensation Iron
Loss
W 3.4 4.0 6.1 11.0 11.7 19.3 19.3 28.8 43.9
n106 Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.5 2.7 2.6 2.5 3.0 3.2 3.2 1.5 1.3
n107 Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance *
Ω41.97 19.08 11.22 5.044 3.244 1.514 1.514
0.797 0.443
n108 Motor Leakage Inductance mH 224.3 168.8 80.76 53.25 40.03 24.84 24.84
16.87 10.59
n110 Motor No-load Current % 73 63 52 45 35 33 33 26 30
n159 Motor 2 Mid. Output
Frequency Voltage
V 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 20.0 20.0
n160 Motor 2 Min. Output
Frequency Voltage
V 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 20.0 20.0
10 Conformance to CE Markings
247
10 Conformance to CE Markings
Points regarding conformance to CE markings are given below.
CE Markings
CE markings indicate conformance to safety and environmental stan-
dards that apply to business transactions (including production, imports,
and sales) in Europe. There are unified European standards for mechan-
ical products (Machine Directive), electrical products (Low Voltage
Directive), and electrical noise (EMC Directive). CE markings are
required for business transactions in Europe (including production,
imports, and sales).
The V7AZ Series Inverters bear CE markings indicating conformance
to the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC Directive.
• Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
• EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
Machinery and installations that incorporate the Inverter are also subject
to CE markings. It is ultimately the responsibility of customers making
products incorporating the Inverter to attach CE markings to the fin-
ished products. The customer must confirm that the finished products
(machines or installations) conform to the European Standards.
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings
Low Voltage Directive
V7AZ Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the Low Volt-
age Directive under the conditions described in European Standard
EN50178.
Requirements for Conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
V7AZ Series Inverters must satisfy the following conditions in order to
conform to the Low Voltage Directive.
• Only basic insulation to meet the requirements of protection class 1
and overvoltage category II is provided with control circuit terminals.
Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product to conform
to CE requirements.
248
• For 400 V Class Inverters, always ground the supply neutral to con-
form to CE requirements.
EMC Directive
V7AZ Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the EMC
Directive under the conditions described in European Standard
EN61800-3.
Installation Method
In order to ensure that the machinery or installation incorporating the
Inverter conforms to the EMC Directive, perform installation according
to the method below.
• Install a noise filter that conforms to European Standards on the input
side. (Refer to EMC Noise Filter on page 251.)
• Use a shielded line or metal piping for wiring between the Inverter
and Motor. Make the wiring as short as possible.
• For details of installation method, refer to Installation Manual (docu-
ment No. EZZ006543.)
10 Conformance to CE Markings
249
Installation and Wiring of Inverter and Noise Filter
(Model: CIMR-V720P1 to 27P5),
(Model: CIMR-V740P1 to 45P5)
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 E
E
WUV
TRS
PE
Control Panel
3-phase Noise Filter
Grounding
Face
Grounding
Face
Metal Mounting
Plate
Shielded
Cable
IM
Inverter
Motor cable: 20 m max.
250
Installation and Wiring of Inverter and Noise Filter
(Model: CIMR-V7B0P1 to B4P0)
LNPE
Single-phase Noise Filter
IM
RS
LN
UVW
E
Control Panel
Metal Mounting
Plate
Grounding
Face
Grounding
Face
Shielded
Cable
Inverter
Motor cable: 20 m max
.
10 Conformance to CE Markings
251
EMC Noise Filter
Volt-
age
Class
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
V7AZ
Noise Filter (Manufacturer: RASMI)
Model No. Num-
ber of
Phases
Rated
Current
(A)
Mass
(kg)
Dimensions
W×L×H
Y×Xφd
200 V B0P1 3G3MV-
PFI1010
1 10 0.6 71 × 169 × 45 51 × 156 5.0
B0P2
B0P4
B0P7 3G3MV-
PFI1020
1 20 1.0 111 × 169 × 50 91 × 156 5.0
B1P5
B2P2 3G3MV-
PFI1030
1 30 1.1 144 × 174 × 50 120 × 161 5.0
B3P7 3G3MV-
PFI1040
1 40 1.2 174 × 174 ×50 150 × 161 5.0
B4P0
20P1 3G3MV-
PFI2010
3 10 0.8 82 × 194 × 50 62 × 181 5.0
20P2
20P4
20P7
21P5 3G3MV-
PFI2020
3 16 1.0 111 × 169 × 50 91 × 156 5.0
22P2
23P7 3G3MV-
PFI2030
3 26 1.1 144 × 174 × 50 120 × 161 5.0
24P0
25P5 3G3MV-
PFI2050
3 50 2.3 184 × 304 × 56 150 × 264 6.0
27P5
400 V 40P2 3G3MV-
PFI3005
3 5 1.0 111 × 169 × 45 91 × 156 5.0
40P4
40P7 3G3MV-
PFI3010
3 10 1.0 111 × 169 × 45 91 × 156 5.0
41P5
42P2
43P0 3G3MV-
PFI3020
3 15 1.1 144 × 174 × 50 120 × 161 5.0
43P7
44P0
45P5 3G3MV-
PFI3030
3 30 2.3 184 × 304 × 56 150 × 264 6.0
47P5
252
The EMC-compliant V7 Series noise filter is footprint type.
HY
X
φd
L
W
CIMR-V7
A to Z: Specifications
A to Z: Type
Revision History
The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the
bottom of the back cover.
Date of
Printing
Rev.
No.
Section Revised Content
March 2005 - First edition
MANUAL NO. TOEP C710606 05A
Printed in Japan March 2005 05-03 C
Date of
printing Date of original
publication
